JP6162758B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable are provided, and after the variable display unit is variably displayed, the display result is obtained by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit. The present invention relates to a slot machine that can derive and win according to a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the winning of the bonus, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a state advantageous to the player such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  For such a slot machine, the player can obtain the benefit of not having to consume medals for setting the number of bets by winning a replay. In some cases, RT (Replay Time) which increases the replay winning probability without change is determined as a gaming state other than a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus. In addition, such control to RT is based on the condition that a predetermined bonus has occurred (for example, refer to Patent Document 1) or the condition that a predetermined RT symbol is derived (for example, (See Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent No. 3581379 JP 2005-131323 A

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation according to the inventions described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units,
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a special transfer winning with a transition of a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
Special gaming state control means for controlling to the special gaming state by the occurrence of the special transfer prize;
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state,
The derivation control means can derive a combination of specific display results when the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state becomes a specific determination result,
The advantageous state control means can be controlled to the advantageous state after the special gaming state ends based on the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state being the specific determination result,
The derivation control means includes
In the normal gaming state, for each of the plurality of variable display units, when the derivation operation means is operated, predetermined derivation control is performed for deriving identification information within the first pull-in range as a display result from a reference position,
In the special gaming state, a specific variable display unit of the plurality of variable display units performs the same derivation control as the predetermined derivation control, while non-specific variable display units other than the specific variable display unit Performs specific derivation control for deriving identification information within a second pull-in range narrower than the first pull-in range from a reference position as a display result when the deriving operation means is operated,
The combination of the specific display results that can be derived when the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state becomes the specific determination result is a state in which the display result is not derived in the non-specific variable display unit However, it can be specified by the display result of the specific variable display unit,
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination unit in the special gaming state is the specific determination result , the combination of the specific display result on the specific variable display unit when the derivation operation unit is operated at a predetermined timing Derivation control to derive the display results that make up
When the determination result of the prior determination unit in the special gaming state is a determination result different from the specific determination result, when the derivation operation unit is operated at the predetermined timing, the specific variable display unit Derivation control is performed in which display results constituting the combination of the specific display results are not derived.

In addition, you may provide the following structures.
(1) Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable
After variably displaying the variable display unit, a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a slot machine (a first machine that can generate a prize according to a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units) In the slot machine 1) in one embodiment,
Prior determination means (lottery process) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a transition winning with a transition of the gaming state before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
From the occurrence of a special transition prize (challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2)) among the above-mentioned transition prizes, until a predetermined end condition (specified number of payouts) is satisfied, the game state is higher than the normal game state (initial game state) Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state (challenge bonus) advantageous to the player (processing for controlling the challenge bonus when winning the challenge bonus in the winning determination process);
Special game control means for controlling the next game as a special game (single bonus) when a specific transition winning (single bonus) occurs among the transfer winnings (control to single bonus when winning a single bonus in winning determination processing) Processing)
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player different from the special gaming state (first embodiment, processing for controlling to RT1 when the challenge bonus is terminated by paying out the prescribed number in the payout processing) With
The advantageous state control means starts control to the advantageous state when the control to the special gaming state is terminated when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied (when the challenge bonus is terminated with a specified number of payouts). Controlled to RT1),
The derivation control means is specified in the game for which the determination has been made on the condition that the advance determination means has determined that the generation of the specific transfer prize is allowed (single bonus winning) during the special gaming state. Combination of display results (single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, special symbol combination) can be derived (refer to reel control when winning all small roles and winning single bonus)
The special gaming state control means is determined to be one of a plurality of types of specific determination results including the specific transition prize in a prize allowed to be generated by the prior determination means during the special gaming state. Including mid-terminating means (processing for terminating the challenge bonus by winning a single bonus in the lottery process) that terminates the control to the special gaming state even if the predetermined termination condition is not satisfied,
The advantageous state control means includes:
The control to the advantageous state is not started when the control to the special gaming state is ended by the midway ending means by being determined to be the first specific determination result among the plurality of types of specific determination results ( When the challenge bonus ends with the single bonus winning, control to RT3)
Control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means when one of a plurality of types of second specific determination results different from the first specific determination result among the plurality of types of specific determination results is determined. Control to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state control means when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means by being determined as one of the plurality of types of second specific determination results among the plurality of kinds of specific determination results. The advantageous degree in the advantageous state controlled by is an advantageous degree according to the type of the second specific determination result,
The degree of advantage in the advantageous state controlled by the advantageous state control means when the control to the special gaming state is terminated when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, according to the fact that the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. The degree of advantage,
The derivation control means includes
In the normal gaming state, for each of the plurality of variable display units, when the derivation operation means is operated, predetermined derivation control is performed for deriving identification information within the first pull-in range as a display result from a reference position,
In the special gaming state, a specific variable display unit of the plurality of variable display units performs the same derivation control as the predetermined derivation control, while non-specific variable display units other than the specific variable display unit Performs specific derivation control for deriving identification information within a second pull-in range narrower than the first pull-in range from a reference position as a display result when the deriving operation means is operated,
When it is determined as one of the plurality of types of second specific determination results during the special gaming state, a combination of specific display results according to the type of the second specific determination results can be derived, and the non-specific Even if the display result is not derived in the variable display section, the type of the second specifying determination result can be specified by the display result of the specific variable display section.

  According to such a configuration, when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means due to being determined as the first specific determination result among the plurality of types of specific determination results, the control to the advantageous state is started. The control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means because it is determined as one of the plurality of types of second specific determination results different from the first specific determination result among the plurality of types of specific determination results. Control to the advantageous state is sometimes started, and control to the advantageous state is started when the control to the special gaming state is terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. For this reason, in the game that is played after the special transfer prize is generated until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the first specific determination result is determined among the specific determination results indicating that the generation of the specific transfer prize is permitted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the control to the special gaming state is terminated and the advantageous state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game that is played after the special transition prize is generated until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  The derivation control means may be capable of deriving the specific display result with higher probability when being controlled to the special gaming state than when being controlled to the normal gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to improve a sense of tension against the specific display result being derived when being controlled to the special gaming state.

The slot machine according to (1) further includes derivation allowance information storage means (RAM 41c, lottery process) for storing derivation allowance information (winning flag) according to the determination result of the prior decision means,
The derivation control means includes
First derivation allowance information including a decision to allow the generation of the specific transfer prize (when the single bonus prize is won and the replay is not won when the challenge bonus is in effect, The combination of the specific display results in the game in which the determination is made (the first combination) (when the first single shift prize is won and the second single shift prize is not won) is stored in the derivation allowable information storage means. 1 specific display result for implementation) can be derived (see modified example (1)),
Second derivation permission information that is different from the first derivation permission information and includes a decision to allow the occurrence of the specific transition prize (when a challenge bonus is being awarded, a replay is won and a single transition prize is awarded) When winning, when winning the first single transfer prize while being in the challenge bonus and winning the second single transfer prize) is stored in the derivation allowance information storage means, A combination of special display results different from the combination of the specific display results (a special display result for the first implementation) can be derived in the determined game (see the modification (1)),
The advantageous state control means starts the control to the advantageous state when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means and the combination of the special display results is derived (Modification (1) )reference).

  According to such a configuration, even when the control to the special gaming state is ended by the midway ending means, the control to the advantageous state is started when the special display result is derived. Therefore, in a game that is played after the special transfer prize is generated and until the end condition is satisfied, the control to the special game state is ended without being determined to allow the generation of the single transfer prize, and the advantageous state The player has a sense of expectation of being controlled, and the second derivation allowance information is stored and the special display result is derived and controlled to the advantageous state even when the single transfer winning is permitted The player can have a sense of expectation for being played.

In the slot machine, a plurality of types of the special display results are provided (see modification (1)),
The derivation control means derives a combination of special display results corresponding to the type of second derivation permission information stored in the derivation permission information storage means among the second derivation permission information (see Modification (1)). ),
The advantageous state control means has a plurality of different expected values of the number of games to be continuously controlled when the combination of the special display results is derived and the control to the special game state is terminated by the midway ending means. Among the advantageous states of the types, control is performed to an advantageous state corresponding to the type of the combination of the derived special display results (see the modified example (1)).

  According to such a configuration, since the expected value of the number of games is controlled to be in an advantageous state depending on the type of special display result, the player's expectation depends on which type of special display result is derived. The feeling can be different.

(2) A plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a slot machine (a first machine that can generate a prize according to a combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units) In the slot machine 1) in the second embodiment,
Prior determination means (lottery process) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a transition winning with a transition of the gaming state before the display result is derived;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
From the occurrence of a special transition prize (challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2)) among the above-mentioned transition prizes, until a predetermined end condition (specified number of payouts) is satisfied, the game state is higher than the normal game state (initial game state). Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state (challenge bonus) advantageous to the player (processing for controlling the challenge bonus when winning the challenge bonus in the winning determination process);
Special game control means for controlling the next game as a special game (single bonus) when a specific transition winning (single bonus) occurs among the transfer winnings (control to single bonus when winning a single bonus in winning determination processing) Processing)
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state (second embodiment, any one of a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry in a winning determination process, winning or special symbol) And a process for controlling to RT1 when the combination of
The advantageous state control means does not start the control to the advantageous state when the control to the special gaming state is terminated when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied (the challenge bonus is terminated when the prescribed number of coins are paid out). Sometimes not controlled to RT1),
The derivation control means is specified in the game for which the determination has been made on the condition that the advance determination means has determined that the generation of the specific transfer prize is allowed (single bonus winning) during the special gaming state. Combination of display results (single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, special symbol combination) can be derived (refer to reel control when winning all small roles and winning single bonus)
The special gaming state control means is determined to be one of a plurality of types of specific determination results including the specific transition prize in a prize allowed to be generated by the prior determination means during the special gaming state. Including mid-terminating means (processing for terminating the challenge bonus by winning a single bonus in the lottery process) that terminates the control to the special gaming state even if the predetermined termination condition is not satisfied,
The advantageous state control means starts the control to the advantageous state when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means by being determined as one of the plurality of types of specific determination results. (The challenge bonus is controlled to RT1 when the single bonus is over)
The degree of advantage in the advantageous state controlled by the advantageous state control means when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means by being determined as one of the plurality of types of specific determination results, The degree of advantage depends on the type of the specific decision result,
The derivation control means includes
In the normal gaming state, for each of the plurality of variable display units, when the derivation operation means is operated, predetermined derivation control is performed for deriving identification information within the first pull-in range as a display result from a reference position,
In the special gaming state, a specific variable display unit of the plurality of variable display units performs the same derivation control as the predetermined derivation control, while non-specific variable display units other than the specific variable display unit Performs specific derivation control for deriving identification information within a second pull-in range narrower than the first pull-in range from a reference position as a display result when the deriving operation means is operated,
When it is determined as one of the plurality of types of specific determination results in the special gaming state, a combination of specific display results according to the type of the specific determination result can be derived, and the non-specific variable display unit Even if the display result is not derived, the type of the specific determination result can be specified by the display result of the specific variable display unit.

  According to such a configuration, when the control to the special gaming state is ended by the midway ending means, the control to the advantageous state is started, and the control to the special gaming state is ended when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. When this happens, control to the advantageous state is not started. For this reason, in a game that is played after a special transfer prize is generated and until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the specific determination result that the generation of the specific transfer prize is permitted is controlled to an advantageous state. The player can have a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game that is played after the special transition prize is generated until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

  The derivation control means may be capable of deriving the specific display result with higher probability when being controlled to the special gaming state than when being controlled to the normal gaming state. Thereby, the feeling of expectation for the specific display result being derived when the game state is controlled to the special game state can be improved.

  The advantageous state controlled by the advantageous state control means is determined by the prior determination means to allow the occurrence of a re-game winning that allows the next game to be executed without using the gaming value. Information for specifying an operation procedure (operation timing, operation order) for generating a winning permitted by the predetermining means may be a state (RT) having a higher probability than the normal gaming state. May be in a state (AT) of informing.

In the slot machine of (2) above, the specific display results are provided in a plurality of types (single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, special symbol combination in the second embodiment),
The advantageous state control means includes a plurality of different expected values of the number of games to be continuously controlled when the control to the special gaming state is ended by the midway ending means and the combination of the specific display results is derived. Of the types of advantageous states, control is made to the advantageous state according to the derived combination type of the specific display result (single bonus winning: 70G, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry winning or special symbol combination stop Time: 50G).

  According to such a configuration, since the expected value of the number of games is controlled to be in an advantageous state depending on the type of specific display result, the player's expectation depends on which type of specific display result is derived. The feeling can be different.

The apparatus further comprises derivation allowance information storage means for storing derivation allowance information according to the determination result of the prior decision means,
The derivation control means includes a specific display result corresponding to the type of derivation permission information stored in the derivation permission information storage means among a plurality of types of derivation permission information including a decision to allow the occurrence of the single transition prize. May be derived (see Modification (2)).

  According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation can be given to storing the derivation allowance information that enables deriving a specific display result of a type that is controlled to an advantageous state with a large expected value of the number of games.

The slot machine further comprises derivation allowance information storage means (RAM 41c, lottery process) for storing derivation allowance information (winning flag) according to the determination result of the prior decision means,
The derivation control means includes
First derivation allowance information including a decision to allow the generation of the specific transfer prize (when the single bonus prize is won and the replay is not won when the challenge bonus is in effect, The combination of the specific display results is derived in the game in which the determination is made when the first single transition winning is won and the second single transition winning is not won) (See variation (3))
Second derivation permission information that is different from the first derivation permission information and includes a decision to allow the occurrence of the specific transition prize (when a challenge bonus is being awarded, a replay is won and a single transition prize is awarded) When winning, when winning the first single transfer prize while being in the challenge bonus and winning the second single transfer prize) is stored in the derivation allowance information storage means, A combination of special display results different from the combination of the specific display results (the second special display result) can be derived in the determined game (see the modification (3)),
The advantageous state control means does not start the control to the advantageous state when the control to the special gaming state is terminated by the midway ending means and the combination of the special display results is derived (Modification (3) )reference).

  According to such a configuration, even when the control to the special gaming state is ended by the midway ending means, the control to the advantageous state is not started when the special display result is derived. For this reason, in a game that is played after the special transfer prize is generated until the end condition is satisfied, even if the single transfer prize is allowed to be generated, the second derivation permission information is stored and the special display result is displayed. It is possible to make the player feel nervous about being derived and not being controlled to an advantageous state.

(7) The winning is generated in accordance with a combination of identification information derived in a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information included in the variable display device according to a predetermined arrangement. (See FIG. 15 and FIG. 19)
In addition, a stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by a player in order to stop the variation display of the identification information is provided,
The derivation control means identifies when the stop operation means is operated (when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated) and is variably displayed in the variable display area at the operation timing. Identification information arranged within a predetermined number of frames that can be drawn (within a range of 0 to 4 frames, within a range of 0 to 1 frame) based on the information (the symbols displayed in the lower part of each reel) ( Reel control according to gaming state),
The predetermined array does not include an array in which identification information (“white 7”) constituting a combination of identification information that is a display result for generating the single shift winning is arranged in the number of drawable frames. (See the arrangement of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R in FIG. 2, "white 7" is not arranged in the range of 0 to 4 frames.)

  According to such a configuration, in the game in which the occurrence of the single transfer prize is permitted, the identification information that constitutes the combination of identification information that is the display result for generating the single transfer prize is not necessarily drawn. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to detect that the occurrence of the single transfer winning is permitted from the display result of the above.

  Note that the derivation control means described above performs an operation for deriving identification information to a specific variable display area (reel 2C, reel 2R) among the plurality of variable display areas when being controlled in the special gaming state. When it is made, the identification information arranged in a specific retractable range (within a range of 0 to 1 frame) is derived with reference to the identification information variably displayed in the specific variable display area. Also good. In this case, the predetermined arrangement does not include an arrangement in which identification information constituting a combination of identification information that is a display result for generating the single shift winning is arranged in the specific number of drawable frames. The arrangement reference of the reel 2C and the right reel 2R in FIG. 2, “white 7” may not be arranged in the range of 0 to 4 frames). Thereby, when the game state is controlled to the special game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to detect that the occurrence of the single transfer winning is permitted from the display result of the game that is allowed to generate the single transfer winning.

(8) There are multiple types of special transfer prizes (challenge bonus (1) and challenge bonus (2)),
The special game state control means is for at least one special game state (challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2)) that has different expected values for the number of games to be continuously controlled, Control to the special gaming state according to the type.

  According to such a configuration, since the expected value of the number of games in the special gaming state varies depending on the type of the special transition winning that has occurred, the single transition winning is permitted while being controlled in the special gaming state. The probability of making a decision can be made different according to the type of special transfer prize that has occurred. As a result, it is possible to vary a sense of expectation for being controlled to an advantageous state according to the type of special transfer winning that has occurred.

(9) Stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to stop the variation display of the identification information;
When a prize-winning (a orange, a plum, a watermelon, a black cherry, a net cherry, a white cherry, a bell, one (1) to (3), etc.) accompanied by a game value is generated among the plurality of types A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to the player,
The pre-determining unit uniformly allows the generation of a prize-winning in which the amount of game value given by the game value-giving unit is different during the special gaming state (all winning combinations are won). Let me)
The derivation control means includes
The display result of the variable display device is derived according to the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation procedure of the stop operation means,
When in the special gaming state, the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting means per game is determined by the stop operation means in the first procedure (procedure for first stopping the left reel 2L). It becomes larger when operated in a second procedure (procedure for stopping at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R before the left reel 2L) different from the first procedure. The display result of the variable display device is derived (refer to reel control during the challenge bonus).

  According to such a configuration, the number of games in the special gaming state is increased by operating in the first procedure while being controlled in the special gaming state, thereby increasing the possibility that the occurrence of a single transfer prize is permitted. Or, by operating in the second procedure, it is possible to reduce the number of games in the special game state and reduce the possibility of occurrence of a single transfer winning, or the player can select and perform a stop operation . As a result, it is possible to change the probability that the single transfer prize is allowed while the player is controlled to the special gaming state according to the procedure of the stop operation selected by the player, and to increase the degree of intervention in the game. it can.

  Note that the first procedure and the second procedure may be different in the order in which the stop operation means are operated (that is, the stop order), and are different in timing when the stop operation means is operated (that is, operation timing). The combination of the stop order and the operation timing may be different (see Modification (4)). Thereby, the variation of the procedure which changes the amount of game value provided by the said game value provision means per game becomes abundant, and the interest of the game in a special game state can be improved.

  Further, the amount of game value given by the game value granting unit per game may be changed by generating a prize-winning in which the amount of game value given according to the procedure is different, Depending on the procedure, it may be changed by changing the number of winning lines where the winning prize is generated, or may be changed by changing the number of winning prizes generated depending on the procedure, and these are selectively combined. It may be changed by (see Modification (4)). As a result, the variation of the specific means for changing the amount of game value given by the game value giving means per game becomes abundant, and the interest of the game in the special game state can be improved. it can.

(10) Game control in which a wiring pattern is formed and has a connector (board-side connector 620a) that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern, and is equipped with a means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game A board (game control board 40);
The game includes at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game to the game control board and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game from the game control board. Electronic components (introduction medal sensor 31);
A relay board having a first connector (connector 621a) and a second connector (connector 622g) for connecting cables, and relaying signal input / output between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board (Operation unit relay board 110);
A connector connected to the connector on the game control board side is provided at one end, and a connector connected to the first connector on the relay board side is provided on the other end, and the game control board and the relay board are electrically connected. A first cable (cable 600a) connected to
A second cable (cable 601g) having a connector connected to the second connector on the relay board side at one end, and the gaming electrical component connected to the other end;
Connector connection part (connector 620a, connector 610a part) between the first cable and the game control board, connector connection part (connector 611a, connector 621a part) between the first cable and the relay board, and the second cable Each of the connector connection portions (connector 622g, connector 612g portion) with the relay board is in a connection release restriction state that cannot be released unless the release restriction portion related to the connector connection is destroyed (connector restriction member). .

  According to such a configuration, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the game control board, a connector connection portion between the first cable and the relay board, and a connector connection between the second cable and the relay board. Each of the portions is in a connection release restricted state that cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connector connection is destroyed, so in any of the three connector connection parts on the game control board and the relay board, Unauthorized devices such as driving tools cannot be connected without leaving traces. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the driving tool as much as possible. Note that the driving tool is used to operate various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board to input and output a signal that simulates the signals input and output to and from the game control board from various electronic components. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open switch 28),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

(D) As the advantageous state, the advantageous state control means performs a control for deriving the re-game winning with a higher probability than the normal gaming state when a predetermined condition (end of the challenge bonus) is established ( RT1),
The advantageous state control means may control any one of a plurality of states having different probabilities that the decision to allow the occurrence of a re-game winning is made (see Modification (12)). Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of state is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the advantageous state control means is further configured to control to the first high probability state (RT1) on the condition that the control to the special gaming state is completed as the advantageous state,
Further, the pre-determining means controls the first regame winning (replay b) and the second regame winning (replay) among at least a plurality of types of regame winnings when being controlled to the first high probability state. c) determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize so that the probability of allowing the derivation is higher than the normal gaming state;
The advantageous state control means includes:
As the advantageous state, the pre-determining means determines that the re-game winning is permitted on condition that the first re-game winning is generated in the first high probability state. Control to a second high probability state (RT2) advantageous to the player having a higher probability than the first high probability state,
On the condition that the second re-game winning is generated in the first high probability state, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted is the first It may be configured to control to a disadvantageous state (RT3) for a player who does not control to the second high probability state even if the first regame winning is generated lower than the one high probability state (Modification) (Refer to (12)).

  According to such a configuration, when the control is performed to the first high probability state, a sense of expectation for the control to the second high probability state is provided, and an anxiety to the control to the disadvantageous state is provided. Compared to a slot machine that is not controlled to the second high probability state or the disadvantageous state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as described above, a plurality of types of special transfer winnings are provided, and when controlling to a special gaming state according to the type of special transfer winning that has occurred, the advantageous state control means Is the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the first re-game winning is permitted and the pre-deciding means determines that the second re-game winning is permitted. The first high probability states (RT1, RT1 ′, RT1 ″) that are controllable to a plurality of types of first high probability states that differ in at least one of the probabilities of being played, depending on the type of the special gaming state that has ended. It may be configured so as to be controlled (see Modification (12)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the bonus is terminated and the RT symbol is derived, that is, controlled to a high probability state according to a certain probability. What kind of special transition prize is generated, that is, a kind of special transition prize that is controlled to the first high probability state of the kind that has a high probability of being determined to allow the occurrence of the first regame prize The player can be made to pay attention to what to do. In addition, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation for the control to the more advantageous second high-probability state according to the type of special gaming state to be controlled, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

  (E) After the start of the high probability state in which the control for deriving the re-game win with a higher probability than the normal gaming state is started, the advance game is performed before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of predetermined games. If the determining means determines that the special transfer prize is allowed to be generated, the re-game high probability state is not terminated, and the special transfer prize is generated, or the special transfer prize is not generated. The high probability state may be terminated when the number of played games reaches the specified number of games (see FIG. 15 and the like).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the occurrence of the special transfer prize is allowed after the high probability state is started and before the specified number of games is reached, the special transfer prize allowed by the determination is not obtained. If it does not occur, the high probability state does not end with the determination, and the high probability state can be continuously controlled until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, even if it is decided to allow the occurrence of a special transition prize in the high probability state, if the special transition prize permitted by the decision does not occur, the high probability state is digested until the specified number of games is reached. Compared with the conventional slot machine where the high probability state ends because the occurrence of a special transition prize is permitted, the player is able to control the high probability state. There is no feeling of loss. In addition, since the decision to allow the special transition prize to be generated by the carryover means is carried over after the next game, it has been determined to allow the special transition prize to occur while being controlled to the high probability state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

(F) The advantageous state control means controls the high probability state (RT) on the condition that the special gaming state has ended,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived from each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
The special transfer prize is a combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas (for example, the challenge bonus (1) is “red 7-grape-melon” and the challenge bonus (2) is “grape- White 7-black BAR "etc.)
The production execution means
Control is made so that it is difficult for the player to specify the type controlled to the special gaming state between the occurrence of the special transfer prize and the end of the special gaming state (regardless of the type of bonus) It may be configured such that a bonus effect having the same content is performed (see Modification (5-2)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the special transfer winning that has occurred from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of special gaming state is being controlled. For this reason, the number of games controlled to a high probability state becomes difficult to understand compared to a conventional slot machine in which the type of special transition prize is specified from the display result, so that the player is focused on continuous effects and carry-over effects. Can effectively improve the interest of the game.

(G) a game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when an award winning is generated among the plurality of types of winnings;
Procedure for performing procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be derived by the prior determination means A notification means (game effect execution process),
The high probability state control means includes means for controlling the high probability state until the special transition prize is generated after the prior decision means determines that the special transition prize is allowed to occur. (Refer to Modification (13)),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (the number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing after being controlled to the high probability state.
The expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting unit per game in the high probability state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification unit when it is within the notification period. When the stop operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet amount is larger than the amount of game value used for setting the bet number. (See modification (13)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the notification period ends due to the bonus winning against the player's will. Expectation of the amount of gaming value to be given when it is in a high-probability state from the time when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special transfer prize is permitted until the special transfer prize is generated and within the notification period The value becomes larger than the amount of game value used for setting the number of bets by operating according to the procedure specified from the notified information. Further, the high probability state is continued as long as at least a special transition prize is not generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the high-probability state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special transfer winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special transition prize and performs a stop operation according to the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the amount of the amount to be given when the player is in a high probability state and within the notification period. Reward value for games can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special transition prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(H) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(I) In the slot machine of (H), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

(J) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special transfer winnings,
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
The specified general winning symbol (orange, plum) does not stop on any winning line in the variable display area (reserved reel) for which the display result has already been derived, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas In a state where the result is not derived (a state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is displayed for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result is not yet derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within a pull-in range) that can be pulled in, any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is won. You may comprise so that control which derive | leads out this specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) may be performed on it.

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(K) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special transfer winnings,
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the generation of a specific general winning (orange, plum) among the general winnings (small role, replaying role) is permitted, and a combination of symbols (orange-orange-) for generating the specific general winning When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) constituting orange, plum-plum-plum) can be pulled in , A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) is derived. It is determined that the specific general winning award (orange, plum) is allowed to occur, and the specific general winning symbol (oren) is determined. , Plum) when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing other than the timing at which it can be pulled (outside the pull-in range), any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control that does not derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating the specific general prize,
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) include the plurality of specific general winning symbols (orange, plum). Is stopped on any one of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5), and the remaining of the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) from which the display result has already been derived In the variable display area (stopped reel), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is not stopped on the one winning line, and the display result is not yet derived in one or more variable display areas. In the absence state (the state where any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is drawn for the variable display area (the changing reel) for which the display result has not yet been derived. When the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range) that can be inserted, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) is derived on the one winning line. You may comprise so that control may be performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. Good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet number determined according to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(L) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special transfer winnings,
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize The second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) to determine the effect at the same time, the determination to allow the occurrence of the specific general winnings and the permission to generate the special transfer winnings at the same time Third decision (orange + CB (1), plum + CB (2)), the occurrence of the specific general prize, the occurrence of the special general prize, and the occurrence of the special transition prize Can be determined at the same time (Orange + 1 (1) + CB (1), Plum + 1 (2) + CB (2))
The third decision occupying the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + CB (1), plum + CB (2)) is made. Probability ratio, probability that the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) and the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + CB (1), plum + 1) The ratio of the probability that the fourth determination is made to the total probability of the sheet (2) + CB (2)) and the first to fourth determinations with different probabilities,
The derivation control means includes
The first pay line (winning line) is established when the first condition that the first determination (orange, plum) or the third determination (orange + CB (1), plum + CB (2)) is satisfied. A combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-) for generating the specific general winning in the line L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5). Control to derive the plum)
The second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2)) and the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + CB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + CB (2)) When the second condition made is satisfied, the second general winning line (winning lines L4, L5) has a higher proportion than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3). You may comprise so that the control which derives the combination (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) for generating a prize may be performed.

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that the special transfer prize is permitted by the prize line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special transition winnings may be permitted, but whether special transition winnings are permitted from the winning line from which the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings is derived. The player's expectation that a special transfer prize is allowed regardless of the winning line where a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. A feeling is not spoiled.

(M) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special transfer winnings,
The derivation control means includes
The plurality of variable display areas as a display result in response to the determination that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum) among the general prizes (small role, re-playing role) is determined. In order to generate a specific general winning on the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) Control to derive the combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum) to determine that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and the occurrence of a special general prize different from the specific general prize The second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) to determine the effect at the same time, the determination to allow the occurrence of the specific general winnings and the permission to generate the special transfer winnings at the same time Third decision (orange + CB (1), plum + CB (2)), the occurrence of the specific general prize, the occurrence of the special general prize, and the occurrence of the special transition prize Can be determined at the same time (Orange + 1 (1) + CB (1), Plum + 1 (2) + CB (2))
The sum of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum) and the probability of making the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + CB (1), plum + 1 (2) + CB (2)) The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the probability, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2)) and the third decision (orange + CB ( 1), the first to fourth determinations are performed with different probabilities of the ratio of the probability of the third determination occupying the total probability of the plum + CB (2));
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum) or the fourth determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + CB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + CB (2)) is made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) ( (Orange-Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum)
When the second condition in which the second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum +1 sheet (2)) and the third determination (orange + CB (1), plum + CB (2)) are made is satisfied In addition, a combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) at a higher rate than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) ( (Orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum) may be controlled to be derived.

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that the special transfer prize is permitted by the prize line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special transition winnings may be permitted, but whether special transition winnings are permitted from the winning line from which the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings is derived. The player's expectation that a special transfer prize is allowed regardless of the winning line where a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. A feeling is not spoiled.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

(N) It is possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game using the game value, and fluctuate multiple types of identification information. In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by deriving the display result to the variable display device to be displayed and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device.
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived for each game, a special transition prize (challenge bonus (1), which includes a transition to a special gaming state (challenge bonus) advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state) (2)) and whether to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including re-game winnings (replays (1) to (4)) that allow the next game to be played without using the gaming value Pre-decision means (lottery process) to determine
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving the display result of the variable display device according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special transfer prize is allowed and the special transfer prize has not occurred, the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transfer prize is carried over from the next game onward. Carry-over means (special work),
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state (RT1, RT2) to be higher than the normal gaming state with a probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted. In the process of setting the specified number of games corresponding to the type of challenge bonus in the RT counter and controlling to RT1, and in the winning determination process, the specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay won among the replays (2) to (4) is set to RT Processing to set to a counter and control to RT2, main control unit 41, sub-control unit 91),
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the production,
The advantageous state control means includes:
After the advantageous state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special transfer winning is allowed before the number of games that have been consumed reaches the predetermined number of games, the advantage is determined. Advantageous state ending means (winning) that terminates the advantageous state when the special transfer prize is generated without ending the state, or when the number of games digested without the special transfer prize has reached the prescribed game number When it is determined that the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won during the RT1 or RT2 in the determination process, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the challenge bonus. Processing, as a result, even if either of the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won during RT1 or RT2, the R There is not the end, the difference is) continued until the specified number of games digestion or winning the challenge bonus,
A remaining game that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games by newly setting the specified number of games on condition that a predetermined specific display result has been derived in the advantageous state Number identification difficulty means (for example, for replays (2) to (4) that trigger the start of control to RT2, each replay (1) improves each winning rate during RT1 that wins with high probability, Each combination is made up of “Replay” and “Bell”, which makes it difficult to understand that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won, or one of the replays (2) to (4). To make it difficult to understand)
The derivation control means does not generate the special transfer prize when it is determined that the re-game winning is allowed while the decision to allow the special transfer prize is allowed. Generate a re-game win (reel control when a special role and a re-playing role are won at the same time, such as when a re-playing role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game)
The production control means includes
In the advantageous state, the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transition prize is carried over over a plurality of games from when the number of remaining games up to the prescribed number of games reaches a predetermined number (5 games). Continuous production execution means (sub-control unit 91, see FIG. 18) for executing a continuous production (continuous production) to notify whether or not
Even when the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games reaches the predetermined number of games when in the advantageous state, the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games is reduced to the predetermined number without executing the continuous effect. Carry-over effect (final game effect) for notifying whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transition prize has been carried over after the number of specific games (final game) is less than the number of games Production execution means (sub-control unit 91, see FIG. 18);
When the specific display result is derived and the specified number of games is newly set while the continuous production is being executed by the continuous production execution means while being controlled to the advantageous state, After the continuous production is ended, predetermined production execution means (sub-control unit 91, sub-control unit 91, which executes a predetermined production (RT continuous notification) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and the specified number of games is newly set. 17 (c) and FIG. 18).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the interrelationship between the start of the production and the RT end timing, and to give a sense of expectation even after the production suggesting the bonus winning situation is performed. It is possible to provide a slot machine that can improve the interest of the game by giving an unexpected performance that may be performed. In other words, even if it is determined that the special transition prize is allowed to occur before the specified number of games is reached after the advantageous state is started, if the special transition prize permitted by the decision does not occur, the determination is made. The advantageous state does not end and the player is not given a sense of loss. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transfer prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it is determined that the occurrence of the special transfer prize is permitted while being controlled to the advantageous state. It can give you a sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state, while it is difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games, the effect of notifying whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of a special transition winning is carried over, It is performed when the remaining number of games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number of games or when the number of specific games is smaller than the predetermined number of games. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the effect of informing whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transition prize has been carried over, and at the same time as the timing at which the effect is started. Unexpectedness can be given to the interrelationship with the state end timing, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the remaining number of games in the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number of games, a continuous effect is executed to notify whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transition prize is carried over, and the continuous effect When the specified number of games is newly set during the execution of, a predetermined effect for notifying that the specified number of games has been newly set is executed after the end of the continuous effect. For this reason, it is possible to have an unexpectedness that a predetermined effect may be performed after a continuous effect is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The remaining game number specifying difficulty means only needs to make it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in an advantageous state. For example, the following means may be used. .

  Example 1: A combination of challenge bonuses (1) and (2) that triggers control of RT1 is composed of different symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel (see Variation (5-2)) .

  Example 2: As a bonus effect, an effect having the same content is executed regardless of the type of bonus that has occurred (see Modification (5-2)).

  Example 3: A liquid crystal display 51 having a display screen larger than that of the variable display device 2 is installed at a position where a player can easily recognize the visual effect, and a design symbol corresponding to the display result of the variable display device 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It is configured so that it is displayed on the winning line of the virtual reel to be displayed in a variable manner, and when any of the challenge bonuses (1) and (2) that triggers control of RT1 is won, When a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, and one of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of the replay (1) or RT2 is won Regardless of the type of replay that has won a prize, the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 (Modification (5-3)) Irradiation)).

  In any of Examples 1 to 3 described above, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the effect of notifying whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special transfer prize has been carried over is started.

  The remaining game number specifying difficulty means may be constituted by a game control means (main control part 41) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (sub control part) for controlling the effect. 91), or both game control means and effect control means. Depending on how the remaining game number specifying difficulty making means is configured, variations of the technique for making it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in an advantageous state can be varied.

  In addition, although the said remaining game number identification difficulty making means illustrated what makes the remaining game number to a specific game number difficult to specify when it is in an advantageous state, it is not restricted to this, When it is in an advantageous state The remaining game number specifying means for making it impossible to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games may be used. Even if the advantageous state control means is configured to include the remaining game number specification disabling means, the same effect as in the case where it is difficult to specify is obtained.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of the start of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the combination of the symbol in a variable display apparatus, the game state read as a lottery object combination, and other information in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating specifically the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of RT production and continuous production, and the table for determining the kind of continuous production and final game production. It is a timing chart for concretely explaining a game production corresponding to a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination in 2nd Embodiment, the combination of the symbol in a variable display apparatus, the game state read as a lottery object combination, and other information. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment.

First Embodiment Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “orange”, “plum”, “watermelon”, “bell”, “replay”, “black cherry” (black paint in FIG. 3) are provided on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. ”,“ Net cherry (net-painted cherry in FIG. 3) ”,“ white cherry (white cherry in FIG. 3) ”,“ black 7 (black 7 in FIG. 3) ”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “net 7 (7 in FIG. 3)” and “white 7 (white 7 in FIG. 3)” are arranged in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. Has been. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a state (also referred to as an initial gaming state), 3 in RT (replay time) 1 to 3 and 2 in a challenge bonus described later, medal stored as credit, The settlement switch 10 operated when the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and bets are returned), A start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, are provided so as to be operable by the player. .

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired during a challenge bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a. (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front face of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of the challenge bonus described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of the challenge bonus described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later Reset / Setup Switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper right side. There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across the symbols lined up in a row, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined down to the right. All of the winning lines L1 to L5 are valid when a predetermined number of bets corresponding to the gaming state are set.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not specifically shown, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 Performs power interruption interrupt processing according to external interrupts. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a transition to a challenge bonus or single bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bets. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing. The challenge bonus may be indicated as CB, and the challenge time provided during the challenge bonus may be indicated as CT. When the challenge bonus is in effect, the game shifts to a challenge time for each game (a gaming state in which the number of sliding symbols on a predetermined reel is limited, but winnings are allowed for all small combinations). The single bonus may be indicated as SB. In some cases, a challenge bonus or a single bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted as described above, and these boards are shown in FIG. As shown, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by the player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are wired through the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in the present embodiment). By connecting, it becomes easy to organize wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always a relay board or game control board. Thus, since the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, it is possible to prevent the connector connecting portion from being searched for during the wiring connecting operation or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets for making the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, and therefore, the cable and the board that connect these boards to each other and the board to the game electronic component The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving tool is, for example, operating various switches provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of a signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from a game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, a state where a special role is won can be easily set. Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There is a risk that the fairness of

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. Connection between the side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g. It is regulated by a regulating member.

  Further, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. For example, an example of connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a will be described. An attachment-side member that is attached to a board case that houses the game control board 40, and a member that is attached to the attachment-side member And a connector cover that covers a part of the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a, attaches the attachment-side member to the board case, and attaches the connector cover. The removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the 620a may be restricted. In this case, the attachment side member and the connector cover remove the connector cover from the attachment side member unless the attachment side member or the connector cover is broken when the attachment side member is attached to the board case. It may be configured not to be able to. Accordingly, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a unless the attachment-side member or the connector cover is broken. In addition, although an example was shown as a connector control member, a connector control member is not restricted to such a thing, If the cancellation | release control part is not destroyed, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 will be cancelled | released. Any device may be used as long as it is configured so that it cannot be performed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. It can be effectively suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the withdrawal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses and the game Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 according to progress, a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connections between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically proceed with the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the release of the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between the connectors 40 and restricting the release of the connection between the connectors. In addition, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel is stopped after the reel starts rotating as in the present embodiment, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40 The same effect can be obtained by providing a connector restricting member only for connector connection between them to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. Of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40, When the connection at any of the connectors is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that, and the door opening notification or the door Since the opening signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, and the cable 600a The connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q are also released. The connector is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. Since it is difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, it is preferable to restrict the removal of the front door 1b. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state where the notification that the door has been opened is not made.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 includes a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25. And the operation unit relay board 110 are connected by a single cable 600a, so that the connector connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a, that is, only one connector connection is connected. By restricting the release, it becomes possible to restrict the release of connections between multiple signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare multiple parts for restricting the release of these connector connections, and the number of these parts can be reduced. .

  When a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine while being accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed to each other. If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  For this reason, in this Embodiment, the coating | coated member which covers the sealing piece of a substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state SB signal indicating that SB is described later, a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is CB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is opened, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, a so-called regular bonus or a big bonus that generates a regular bonus with a high probability is not installed. 40 and the external output board 1000, in addition to the signal line for outputting the above signal, an RB signal indicating that the gaming state is in regular bonus, and BB indicating that the gaming state is in the big bonus A signal line for outputting a signal is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the SB signal, the CB signal, and the RB signal (RB signal, BB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, SB signal, CB signal, (RB signal, BB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal among these external output signals, The setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal, which is a serial signal that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and externally converted. The door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be output from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a serial signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a payout error signal can be output by an AND circuit or the like. If it is output, an error signal may be output to the outside with one terminal. Even in this case, an error occurs in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. It is possible to specify that either one is occurring, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used by the main CPU 41a to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above, for example, in order to manage sales in the hall computer. And a control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment detects the main CPU 41a when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined. Outputs medals IN signals for the set number of bets together.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collected. Since it is outputted to the outside, it becomes possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the betting number, and the control relating to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment indicates that, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Outputs OUT signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal is actually output. Since the number of medals paid out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively at the end of the medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotating shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without performing the next game start operation), and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released when (the same timing as) has elapsed (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so the player is playing a game. In the meantime, it is possible to maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced. On the other hand, in a state in which the player is unlikely to play, the load on the component parts of the stepping motor can be reduced.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and 3 By performing the reel motor stop control together with the phase excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and then the three-phase excitation stop control. As a result, the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. The inner rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of the CB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of CB, such as stop control table, stop symbol, number of medals paid out, total number of medals paid out during CB, winning flag (small role, replay) initialized at the end of each game , Single bonus) and winning flags are stored. The special work is initialized at the time of winning without being cleared at the end of each game, such as data for sending commands to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc. This is a work in which a winning flag (challenge bonus (1) to (2)) and a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game are stored. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the CB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and when the transition to the setting change mode is performed, when initialization is performed or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 1 is the state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is the initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the CB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the set stop phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting change by maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work. In this case, these stop phases can be specified. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is used as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set and set in the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting change. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . Note that the data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Then, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excitation in match condition, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) without performing the game start operation, similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the standby timing (same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) elapses, and by doing so, there is no burden on the parts constituting the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and if it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or Until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated), the game is controlled to a full error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.

  In the present embodiment, medals thrown in from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and medals overflowing when the hopper tank 34a is full are stored in the overflow tank 35. The full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. However, the overflow tank 35 is not provided, and whether or not the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a exceeds a certain amount. A full tank sensor may be provided to detect whether the hopper tank 34a is full, and the full tank sensor is used to detect the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects a full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, the effective insertion of medals is performed. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits. If no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, medals stored in the overflow tank 35 based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control ends. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage in the tank is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, it is monitored whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full. However, the amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full despite the fact that the amount of stored medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not the game has entered the state, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player. There is also a problem that increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game. It is not detected and the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not it is full is not performed wastefully, and the full state can be monitored efficiently. The control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor required for the store clerk to resolve the full tank status. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the tank is in a tan state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank condition.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of medals is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without inserting medals. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. The full tank error state is controlled before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the medal is paid out and controlling to a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not a full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the tank is full is determined at the timing when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is full at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, or to start the game. You may make it determine whether it is a full state at the time of operation detection, or the time of completion | finish of game control.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the control of the game ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is performed wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, standby for the effect control board 90 A plurality of types of commands including a command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is set to the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT, challenge bonus, single bonus, etc.) and the number of remaining games of RT. A command that can identify a set value, and is transmitted after a setting end command, which will be described later, and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the CB ends, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the bet number is not yet set and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in start-up processing and game processing described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt processing described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. A plurality of commands can be transmitted by transmitting only one of a command stored in the command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, the sub-control unit 91 can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  Note that the timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored. The command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer are provided. Alternatively, it is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. (In the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that.) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or if the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is made positive logic in the port input process performed in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, a logical state of about 100 ms (door monitoring process 45 times) is performed for the fixed state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms to transmit the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer. However, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. As a result, even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, it is normal that after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input processing performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to a positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring processing performed every 2.24 ms is 1 acquired in the port input processing described above. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to OR each separately and use the result to make one BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In the present embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. In this case, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, and when a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the first timer interrupt is performed thereafter. The command received by the process (sub) is read and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by reception of a certain command (excluding a continuous effect described later), the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, An effect based on a control pattern corresponding to a newly received command is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the betting number has been set, the effect being executed is displayed. It is supposed to cancel. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the bonus finalization effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is not displayed. It is not referred to as a control pattern, and a demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively suppress illegal sales such as providing slot machines 1 that are set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 that controls the special role. It is executed by a production device such as the LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is set illegally, the special control is made when the main control unit 41 is restarted. The winning device is informed that the winning is made and it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool is used when the game player starts business. It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, In addition, when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 are notified of the special role winning. Also good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  In the present embodiment, only the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the electronic component (input medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game is a connector restricting member. The use of unauthorized equipment is also prevented by restricting the release of the connection between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is played before the power interruption. When winning, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not it is structured to restrict the insertion / removal between connectors, so that the structure for regulating the insertion / removal between connectors can be prevented. In this way, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintenance such as at the time of failure is also possible. It is also possible to improve the resistance.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is made.

  Although it is necessary to open the front door 1b in order to perform some fraudulent action on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, in the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such a fraud and to detect it early even if a fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and indicates the detection state after the change when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. Only by transmitting a door command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a indicates a door opening detection switch indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of 25, and the door opening notification is performed based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a opens the front door 1b. In the notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening). Detection chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In the present embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. However, even if the door open detection switch 25 detection state changes while waiting for transmission of a power-on command or an initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the door command and normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If the door command is stored while interrupting the message in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed is overwritten, and the door command is partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a command is stored, and when reels are shaken or medals are paid out. There is a possibility of affecting other controls such as blurring, but the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above, so that the door command is regularly used for basic processing. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing and stored in the transmission buffer within the timer interrupt processing (main) that is executed by interrupting the interrupt, it is necessary to prohibit the interruption when storing the normal command And the above problems can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25, and after the door command is transmitted, the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is further transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required until the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are used in the progress of the game. When an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state changes the detection state of these switches, the operation reception of these switches is a valid period for the progress of the game. The sub CPU 91a can specify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing that coincides with the timing at which the game is activated and the game control proceeds, if the operation of these switches is in an invalid state, that is, the timing is not directly related to the game progress control. It becomes possible to execute.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. Even so, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If an operation detection command is stored while the normal command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, and the rotation of the reel Other controls, such as blurring when paying out medals, may affect other controls. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and when the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, it is possible to inspect the operation of the designated component. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical component during the bonus, and the BGM output during the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. When performing, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation mode in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration component are specified. Operate with.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in a reception buffer that stores a command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer is provided. Thus, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated in such a number as to prevent overflow in the case of a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) ), And a large number of inspection commands can be transmitted continuously up to the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 commands in this embodiment). Can effectively increase the efficiency.

  In the present embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually specified and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting inspection commands for designating a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each effect part operates normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, an effect part corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands on the basis of the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer. In this case, even when test commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command, but with one inspection command. It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing performance tests for all production parts at once, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so operation is more efficient. A test can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. In this case, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation There is a problem that the test is shifted to the test, and the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives an inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel and performs the operation check of the touch panel, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, no new command is received. Even if a new command is sent during this period, a new command is detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Is not received, and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, for example, buttons and dials may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be applied. In the same way as above, even if the inspection command is erroneously sent without waiting for the completion of the operation check, the operation check is performed by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected. The test can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the test command for specifying the operation check can be used. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, combinations of symbols in the variable display device 2, gaming state read out as a lottery target combination, and other information. As the types of RTs in the present embodiment, RT1 to RT3 having different probabilities of winning the re-gamer are provided. RT1 is controlled when the challenge bonus (1) or the challenge bonus (2) ends. RT2 is controlled when one of the replays (2) to (4) wins. In RT3, when a single bonus is won or one of the black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries described later is won (except when the challenge bonus is continued), and a combination of special symbols described later is displayed on the winning line. Controlled when done. The gaming state controlled by RT1 to RT3 may be simply referred to as RT.

  The challenge bonus (1) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The challenge bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “network 7-network 7-network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning the challenge bonus (1) or (2), the gaming state shifts to a challenge bonus corresponding to the winning combination. While the gaming state is in the challenge bonus, the corresponding challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When controlled by the challenge bonus, it is repeatedly controlled at the challenge time until the challenge bonus ends. While in the challenge time, a flag during the challenge time is set in the RAM 41c. In the internal lottery in the game during the challenge bonus, the winning flag is forcibly set to the ON state for all small roles. Further, for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R in the challenge bonus, a value of 0 to 1 is determined as the number of frames to be drawn, which will be described later, and a reel within a range of a maximum of 1 frame is detected after a stop operation is detected. The reel control for stopping the operation is performed. In addition, the number of bets to play the game during the challenge bonus is set to 2. As a result, during the challenge bonus, as will be described later, the payout number when winning a black cherry, a net cherry, and a white cherry is fifteen.

  The challenge bonus (1) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player has reached 300 or more. On the other hand, the challenge bonus (2) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 150 or more.

  In addition, when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won, after the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is finished, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits. It is controlled for a certain period of time in a frozen state where the progress is impossible. Also, when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) ends when the stop function is enabled, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of credits, and the game cannot be progressed. Control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the stop state.

  In addition, after the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is completed, the gaming state is controlled by RT1 until a predetermined termination condition is established for each type of challenge bonus that has been completed. Termination conditions include winning the challenge bonus, playing a specified number of games (70 times after the challenge bonus (1) ends, 50 times after the challenge bonus (2) ends), or replays (2) to (4) ) By winning one of the following.

  In RT1, the probability of winning replay (1) is higher than that in the initial gaming state, and the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) is higher than in the initial gaming state. Become.

  Even if the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, There will be no winnings. This is because the symbols constituting each of the challenge bonuses (1) and (2) are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state, single bonus, or RT1 to RT3, the challenge bonuses (1) and (2) are orange or plum and one (1) or (2), respectively. May be simultaneously read as a lottery target in the internal lottery. Therefore, when a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously read as a lottery target combination and won, the read challenge bonus, orange or plum, and 1 (1) or 1 (2) overlap. Will win.

  Note that “+” and “˜” are written between winning combinations to indicate that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in internal lottery. For example, in the case of “Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1)”, it indicates that Challenge Bonus (1), Orange, and 1 (1) are simultaneously read out as the lottery target in the internal lottery. .

  The single bonus is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any winning line. This is because the symbols constituting the single bonus (“white 7”) are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For this reason, even if the single bonus is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switches 8L to 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to enable the winning of the single bonus, the symbols constituting the single bonus are displayed on the winning line. Can not be stopped. Note that the symbols constituting the single bonus (“white 7”) are arranged only one symbol on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For this reason, the drawable rate that can be drawn on the winning line in the range of 4 frames is 1/3 × 1/3 × 1/3 = 1/9.

  If a single bonus is won while being controlled by the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus is also terminated when the game won for the single bonus is terminated. For this reason, in the game where the single bonus is won while being controlled by the challenge bonus, the winning flags of all the small roles are set as in the case of the challenge bonus, and the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are challenged. The same reel control as in the bonus is performed.

  Further, “white 7”, which is a single bonus configuration symbol, is not arranged in two or more within the retractable range in each of the reels 2L to 2R. For this reason, it is impossible to stop the single bonus component symbol on the winning line in a game that has won the single bonus during the challenge bonus. Therefore, the reel control of the game and whether or not the single bonus has been won. It can be prevented as much as possible from being easily inferred from the display result.

  When the single bonus is won, the game state is shifted to the single bonus for the next one game. In the single bonus, in particular, the probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery is higher than in the initial gaming state (in this embodiment, the number of judgment values for a predetermined small role (black / white / net cherry) is increased by “1”. ). While the gaming state is the single bonus, the single bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  If the single bonus is won in the initial gaming state, the challenge bonus, the single bonus, or RT1, the process proceeds to RT3. The RT3 end condition is established by winning a challenge bonus or by playing a specified number of games (100 times of game play). If the single bonus is won while the challenge bonus is in effect, the process shifts to RT3 in preference to RT1 transferred due to the end of the challenge bonus.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol is used only when a challenge bonus is in effect and a single bonus is won and neither the single bonus nor the black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry described later can be won. The reel control is performed so that the combination of is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The special symbol is composed of a combination of “white 7-any-bell”. When the combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed on the winning line during the challenge bonus, the gaming state is shifted to RT3. The termination condition of RT3 controlled by the special symbol combination being stopped and displayed is established by winning a challenge bonus or by playing a prescribed number of games (150 games).

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (2) is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (4) is awarded when a combination of “replay-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The symbols constituting each of the replays (1) to (4) are arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For this reason, replays (1) to (4) can be awarded in principle regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, except when the challenge bonus is being applied. When you win the replay, there is no medal payout, but you can start the next game without setting the number of bets again, so it is practical to pay out medals corresponding to the number of bets that you no longer need to set in the next game Will be the same.

  When any one of the replays (2) to (4) wins, the gaming state is controlled at RT2 until a termination condition predetermined for each type of replay won. Ending conditions are winning a challenge bonus or playing a specified number of games (200 after replay (2) win, 100 after replay (3) win, 70 after replay (4) win) It is established by.

  Replays (2) to (4) are drawn at a higher probability than in the initial gaming state when the winning probability of replay (1) is in RT1. For this reason, even if the replays (2) to (4) are won and won, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that the player has only won the replay. Further, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. For this reason, even if it is specified by the player that the replay prize is different from the replay (1), it can be difficult to understand which of the replays (2) to (4) is won. It can be made easier. As a result, even when the player is awarded one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlled by RT2 during RT1, it can be difficult to understand that the control is performed by RT2. Even if it is specified that the game is controlled by RT2, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many games RT2 are controlled by. For this reason, it is possible to obscure the number of end games of a series of RTs (RT1 and RT2) started after the challenge bonus is ended by paying out the prescribed number.

  The black cherry is awarded when the symbol “black cherry” is derived to one of the winning lines for the reel 2L. The net cherry is awarded when the symbol “net cherry” is derived to one of the winning lines for the reel 2L. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the reel 2L.

  The symbols ("black cherry", "net cherry", and "white cherry") of the reel 2L constituting each of the black cherry, the net cherry, and the white cherry are not arranged within 5 frames on the reel 2L. For this reason, even if one of the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning, the black The symbols of the reel 2L constituting each of the cherry, net cherry, and white cherry cannot be stopped on the winning line. Therefore, each black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry can be said to be a winning combination if the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing enabling winning of the winning cherry role. It can be said that the winning can be avoided by doing.

  In the internal lottery for black cherries, net cherries and white cherries, black cherries and white cherries are simultaneously read as lottery targets and lottery, and net cherries and white cherries are simultaneously read as lottery target roles. Will be drawn. In addition, symbols (“black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry”) constituting each of the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are arranged on the reel 2L only one symbol at a time. For this reason, in the range of 4 frames, the pull-in possibility rate at which either black cherry or white cherry or net cherry or white cherry can be pulled on the winning line is 2/3.

  When winning a black cherry, net cherry or white cherry, one medal is paid out when the number of bets is “3”, that is, when the gaming state is not during the challenge bonus, and the number of bets is “2”. When it is, that is, during the challenge bonus, 15 medals are paid out.

  When the number of bets is “3”, that is, in a gaming state other than during the challenge bonus, the symbol “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” stops at the top or bottom of the left reel 2L and wins a prize. When winning, the combination of black cherries, net cherries or white cherries is aligned with the two pay lines L2, L4 or the pay lines L3, L5, and black cherries, net cherries or white on the two pay lines. Since winning a cherry, two medals will be paid out.

  In addition, when the game state is an initial game state, a challenge bonus (limited to a game to be ended), a single bonus, or RT1, when a black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is won, a predetermined termination condition The gaming state is controlled by RT3 until is established. The end condition is established by winning a challenge bonus or by playing a specified number of games (150 times after winning).

  Orange is awarded when the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The plum is awarded when a combination of “plum-plum-plum” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The symbols constituting the roles of orange, plum and watermelon are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. For this reason, in principle, the roles of orange, plum, and watermelon cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing.

  Bell wins when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any winning line, and nine medals are paid out. Since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, in principle, except when the challenge bonus is in effect, the timing of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R It is possible to win.

  One (1) is awarded when a combination of “net 7-white cherry-black cherry” is aligned on any of the winning lines. One (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-black cherry-net cherry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. One (3) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-net cherry-white cherry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning, one medal is paid out.

  Reel 2L-2R composing one piece (1)-(3) ("Black 7", "Net 7", "White 7", "Black Cherry", "Net Cherry", "White Cherry") The reels are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, as with the challenge bonus, single bonus, etc., with regard to one piece (1) to (3), if the stop switch 8L to 8R is operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win one winning combination, It can be said that the winning combination can be avoided by operating at a timing other than the appropriate timing.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15, challenge bonuses (1) to (2) and a single bonus as special roles, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, orange, plum, watermelon as small roles Replays (1) to (4) are defined as one replaying combination (1) to (3) and a bell. In addition, the combination of the winning combination simultaneously with the special combination in the slot machine 1 includes a challenge bonus (1) + orange, a challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), a challenge bonus (2) + plum, a challenge bonus ( 2) + Plum + 1 (2), Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2) are defined.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery depends on whether the gaming state is the initial gaming state, single bonus, RT1 to RT3, or a challenge bonus. Different.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state, single bonus, RT2 or RT3, challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2), single bonus, challenge bonus (1) + orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange +1 (1), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Replay (1), Black Cherry + White Cherry, Net Cherry + White Cherry, Orange, Orange +1 ( 1), plum, plum + 1 sheet (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet (3), and bell are subject to internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as internal lottery target roles. Even if the winning flag of the challenge bonus has been carried over, and even if the winning bonus (1) or (2) is read as a lottery target and won, the winning flag of the corresponding selected challenge bonus will be renewed. If there is another small combination that is not set and read simultaneously, only the winning flag of the small combination is set.

  Single bonus, challenge bonus (1) + orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (2) + plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 when game state is challenge bonus (2), replay (1), black cherry + white cherry, net cherry + white cherry, orange, orange +1 (1), plum, plum +1 (2), watermelon, watermelon +1 (3), bell It becomes a target of internal lottery and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. In the case of a challenge bonus, even if a combination of winning combinations including the challenge bonus (1) or (2) in the lottery target is read and won, the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won. The flag is not set, but only the winning flags of other small roles read at the same time are set.

  When the game state is an initial game state, a challenge bonus, a single bonus, RT2 or RT3, replays (2) to (4) that trigger the RT2 are not read out as a lottery target role and do not win. Is set to In addition, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state or the single bonus, the replays (2) to (4) that trigger the RT2 may be read as the lottery target combination and won with a predetermined probability. Good. Thereby, when the gaming state is the initial gaming state or the single bonus, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning one of the replays (2) to (4) and being controlled to RT2. .

  When the gaming state is RT1, challenge bonus (1), challenge bonus (2), single bonus, challenge bonus (1) + orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (2) + Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Replay (1), Replay (2), Replay (3), Replay (4), Black Cherry + White Cherry, Net Cherry + White Cherry, Orange, Orange +1 sheet (1), plum, plum +1 sheet (2), watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet (3), and bell are subject to internal lottery and are sequentially read out as the subject combination of internal lottery. Even if the winning flag of the challenge bonus has been carried over, and even if the winning bonus (1) or (2) is read as a lottery target and won, the winning flag of the corresponding selected challenge bonus will be renewed. If there is another small combination that is not set and read simultaneously, only the winning flag of the small combination is set.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-described winning combination (derivation of a winning display result) is allowed is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the obtained random numbers for internal lottery and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the single bonus internal lottery is set to “3276” in any gaming state. Therefore, the single bonus is set to win with a probability of 3276 / 65536≈5% regardless of the gaming state. Note that the number of determination values may be set so that the winning probability of the single bonus varies depending on the set value and the gaming state.

  As described above, when the single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus is ended when the game ends. For this reason, during the challenge bonus, a lottery for determining whether or not to end the challenge bonus is performed with a probability of 5% for each game.

  In addition, the probability of winning for replay is set to be higher in RT than in the initial gaming state. For example, the number of replay determination values is “9000” when the game state is different from RT (for example, the initial game state), “20000 + 300 × 3 = 20900” when RT1, and “20000 when RT2”. When “39000” is RT3, “9001” is set. Therefore, the probability of winning a replay is highest when it is RT2, and the number of determination values is set so that RT1, RT3, and a gaming state other than RT are in this order.

  Of the RTs, RT2 is an advantageous RT that is advantageous to the player because the probability of winning the replay is much higher than in the initial gaming state. RT2 may be a gaming state in which the payout rate of medals per game (winning probability of the target combination × total value of payout number / number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1.

In addition, the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is high when RT1. Specifically, since the winning rate of each of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is RT1, “300” is specified as the number of determination values, so 300 / 65536≈ 0.000457. Therefore, the probability of winning in one of the replays (2) to (4) during RT1 controlled after the end of the challenge bonus (1) and controlling to RT2 is 1- [1- (0.000457 × 3) ] ⁷⁰ ≈ 62%. In addition, the probability of winning in any one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlling to RT2 during RT1 controlled after the end of the challenge bonus (2) is 1- [1- (0.000457 × 3) ] ⁵⁰ ≈ 50%. Moreover, when it is RT1, the probability of winning the replay (1) is also increased. For this reason, RT1 out of RTs is a chance RT because the probability of winning a replay is higher than in the initial gaming state, and the probability of being controlled by RT2 is high, giving the player a chance. . RT1 may be a gaming state in which the payout rate of medals per game (winning probability of the target combination × total value of payout number / number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is finished, the control is performed to RT1 in which the winning probability of replays (2) to (4) that becomes a trigger for transition to RT2 is increased. Therefore, the player's expectation to shift to RT2 can be enhanced by being controlled by RT1.

  RT2 has a larger number of default games than RT1, and the replay winning probability is improved, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced compared to that of RT1, and more medals than RT1 Expect to win. For this reason, the player's expectation to move to RT2 can be further enhanced by being controlled by RT1.

  Also, RT1 and RT2 will be terminated when the challenge bonus is won if the challenge bonus is not won even if the challenge bonus is won before reaching the specified number of games after the RT starts. If you do not win the winning challenge bonus, you can continue to control the RT until you reach the specified number of games. If no bonus is awarded, RT can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, and the player is not given a sense of loss.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the challenge bonus is carried over from the next game onward until the challenge bonus is won, it is possible to win the challenge bonus won during that time after the RT reaches the specified number of games Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the challenge bonus at the end of RT.

  On the other hand, the probability of winning the replay when RT3 is only increased by “1” in the number of determination values compared to when the game is in the initial gaming state. For this reason, RT3 can be said to be a disadvantageous RT that is disadvantageous for the player in that the probability of winning a replay is much lower than that of RT1 and RT2.

  As described above, RT3 is shifted to winning a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry, or a combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the game state (initial game state, challenge bonus, single bonus, RT1) can be transferred to RT3, the single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are not won, and the combination of special symbols is stopped. The player can be expected to not be displayed.

  The single bonus is a winning combination that can be made impossible to win according to the player's game skill even when winning. The special symbol combination is stopped when the bonus is in the challenge bonus and the single bonus is won, and neither the single bonus nor the black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry, which will be described later, can be won. Limited to cases.

  In addition, the winning rate is set very low for black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry. As shown in FIG. 15, the number of determination values acquired in the internal lottery of black cherry + white cherry and net cherry + white cherry is “100” when the game state is other than the single bonus, which is a single bonus. Sometimes “101” increased by “1” is set. For this reason, the winning ratio of each of black cherry + white cherry and net cherry + white cherry is approximately 100 / 65536≈0.15%. Furthermore, even when black cherry + white cherry or net cherry + white cherry is won and the stop switch 8L is operated in a state where it is not recognized which one is won, 1/3 It becomes impossible to win with the probability of. As described above, the symbols constituting black cherry, net cherry and white cherry are arranged at intervals of 7 frames on the left reel 2L, and the symbols constituting black cherry or white cherry, net cherry or white cherry are arranged. This is because the probability that the player can be drawn on the winning line is 14/21 = 2/3, and the probability that the player cannot be drawn is 7/21 = 1/3. Therefore, the probability of winning one of black cherry, white cherry, and net cherry is extremely low (0.15% + 0.15%) × 2/3 = 0.2%.

  When the winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combinations determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a storage area of 2 bytes, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work for which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of the system. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, such as when a special role and a small role are won simultaneously (challenge bonus ( 1) + Orange, etc.), the number of draws is determined so that the winning special role will be drawn to the maximum of 4 frames in the winning line, and the winning special role will be up to 4 frames in the winning line. For stop operation positions that cannot be drawn in the range, a stop control table in which the number of draws is determined so that the selected small role is drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. . As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you can't withdraw a special role that is elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can align and stop the small roles that are elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn simultaneously, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  If a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (such as challenge bonus (1) + replay (1)), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from the previous game Then, a stop control table in which the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In addition, “Replay” and “Bell”, which are symbols constituting the re-gamer, are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the range, when the re-gamer is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special role and the replaying role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the replaying role is drawn in, and the special role is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the replaying role.

  When multiple types of small roles are elected at the same time (Orange + 1 (1), etc.), the small number with the number of payouts out of the selected small roles will be drawn to the winning line to the maximum in the range of 4 frames. In the stop operation position where a small number of winning small roles with a large number of payouts cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the number of paying out of the selected small roles A stop control table in which the number of drawn frames is determined so as to draw a small role with a small amount to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is performed, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a small combination with a large number of payouts can be stopped among the selected small combinations that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, If control is performed to stop them together and the winning combination with a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line cannot be withdrawn, the winning portion with a maximum payout number cannot be drawn. If it is possible to align and stop small combinations with a small number of payouts among the selected small combinations, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the non-winning combination is stopped in the pull-in range of 4 frames. Control will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, so that a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  Special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously, such as when multiple types of small roles are elected while special roles are carried over from before the previous game, or when special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously. If there is a match (Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), etc.), the number of draws will be determined so that the winning special role will be drawn to the maximum of 4 frames in the winning line. As for the stop operation position where the special role cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the winning small role with a large number of payouts will be drawn into the winning line so that it will be drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames. There is a number of frames, and the selected special roles and the small roles with a large number of payouts among the selected small roles will not be able to be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames. Number of payouts Not a small win to create a stop control table number pull frame is defined to draw the maximum extent of 4 frames in the winning line, performing stop control of the reels. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you cannot pull in a special role that has been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, arrange a small role with a large number of payouts out of the winning roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, they will be controlled to stop them together, and special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 tops on the winning line will not be able to withdraw those with a large number of payouts. If a small combination with a small number of payouts can be stopped on the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, a control is performed to stop the combination and stop it. The role is 4 So that the control for removing Te stopped at pull-in range of Ma is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it becomes possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It is possible to win a prize. In the case where a special role and a small role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the special role is withdrawn and the special role and the small role are not aligned on the winning line. In this case, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, and a plurality of types of small combinations are not arranged on the winning line at the same time.

  Here, the reel control when controlled by the challenge bonus will be described. As described above, when the challenge bonus is in effect, the maximum number of frames that can be drawn is set to 4 frames for the left reel 2L and 1 frame for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. In the internal lottery during the challenge bonus, winning flags are set for all small combinations. In addition, since the prescribed number of bets is 2 during the challenge bonus, the payout number of each of the black cherry, the net cherry, and the white cherry is 15. Based on these characteristic points in the challenge bonus, the reel control of each of the reels 2L to 2R will be described.

  For example, if you have won all the small roles in the Challenge Bonus, but have not won other single bonuses or replays, you can choose from the small roles that have a large number of payouts: Orange, Plum, Watermelon, Black Cherry, Net Cherry, The number of draw-in frames is determined so that any one of the 15 payers such as cherries is drawn into the winning line within the range of the maximum drawable number per reel, and 15 within the range of the maximum drawable number per reel. As for the stop operation position where none of the sheet payouts can be drawn into the winning line, a bell with a small payout number or one (1) to (3) should be drawn into the winning line within the range of the maximum drawable number per reel. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is defined is created and reel stop control is performed.

  As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if any of the 15 payout combinations can be stopped on the winning line within the range of the maximum number of drawables for each reel, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If none of the 15 payouts can be drawn on the winning line within the range of the maximum drawable number per reel, the number of payouts within the range of the maximum drawable number per reel on the winning line If it is possible to stop with a small number of bells and one (1) to (3), the control is performed to align and stop them. That is, priority is given to the control for aligning 15 payouts on the winning line among small bells with small payout numbers and small payouts with more payout numbers than 1 (1) to (3). Only when the 15-sheet payout cannot be pulled in, it is possible to win a bell with a small number of payouts or one (1) to (3).

  Even if a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus will not be started without starting the above-described control to RT3 unless the challenge bonus is terminated by the game. Will continue.

  In the present embodiment, in the left reel 2L, the symbols ("watermelon", "white cherry", "orange", "black cherry", "plum", "net cherry") constituting the 15-payout combination are simultaneously displayed on the winning line. Are arranged at intervals of at least three frames. For this reason, depending on the stop operation position of the left reel 2L, there are cases where black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries whose winning is determined only by the display result of the left reel 2L can be drawn on the winning line. In some cases, cherry, white cherry cannot be drawn on the winning line, and orange, plum, and watermelon are drawn on the winning line. If black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries cannot be drawn on the winning line in the left reel 2L, orange, plum, and watermelon are won in the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, where the number of frames to be drawn is limited to 1. If the stop operation is not performed at the stop operation position where it can be pulled in on the line, the 15-sheet payout cannot be obtained. As a result, the player may perform a stop operation according to whether or not he / she wishes to win a 15-sheet payout combination, and either of the possibility of winning the 15-sheet payout combination or the possibility of not winning the 15-sheet payout combination. Can be increased.

  For example, if the player wishes to win 15 payouts, a stop operation that can pull a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry on the left reel 2L onto the winning line by performing a so-called push. By stopping at the position, it is possible to select to increase the possibility of winning a 15-payout combination. In addition, when a player who cannot push in wants to win a 15-payout winning combination, for example, by stopping at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R before the left reel 2L, It is possible to choose to increase the possibility of winning a payout combination. In this case, if at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L, there is a possibility that the symbols that cannot win any of orange, plum, and watermelon at that time may stop. If this happens, reel control is performed to draw black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry onto the winning line in the left reel 2L regardless of the subsequent stop operation position of the left reel 2L, and it is possible to reliably obtain 15 payouts. it can.

  Also, if the player does not wish to win a 15-payout combination, it stops at a stop operation position at which one of the orange, plum, and watermelon on the left reel 2L can be pulled onto the winning line by performing a so-called push. Operate and stop at the stop operation position where at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R does not draw any of orange, plum, and watermelon on the winning line, thereby increasing the possibility of not winning the 15-sheet payout combination. You can choose that.

  Next, when all the small roles are won and replay (1) is won during the challenge bonus, the selected replay (1) is drawn into the winning line within the maximum drawable range for each reel. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, the left reel 2L is controlled so that the symbols of the replay (1) are aligned and stopped on the winning line in a drawing range of up to four frames. During the challenge bonus, the maximum number of frames that can be drawn in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is determined to be one frame, so even if the replay (1) is won, the replay (1) is placed on the winning line. There are cases where it cannot be pulled in. For example, referring to FIG. 3, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol “Bell” of area number 15 of middle reel 2 </ b> C is positioned in the lower stage, “Replay” may be drawn on the winning line. Can not. As described above, with regard to the stop operation position where the replay of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R cannot be drawn within the range of the maximum drawable number of frames, for example, orange, plum and watermelon are given top priority, Create a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the maximum number of frames that can be drawn into the winning line is given priority over the bell and the last (1) to (3)). The stop control is performed. Thereby, when the replay (1) selected in the range of the maximum drawable number for each reel can be aligned and stopped on the winning line when the stop operation is performed, these are stopped together. If control is performed and the replay (1) selected in the range of the maximum drawable number per reel on the winning line cannot be drawn, the range of the maximum drawable number per reel on the payline If the small combinations according to the predetermined priority order can be aligned and stopped, the control is performed to align and stop the small combinations. That is, the control for aligning the replay (1) on the winning line is prioritized over the small role, and only when the replay (1) cannot be drawn, the small role according to the predetermined priority order can be won. . For example, among small bells with a small number of payouts or small roles with a large number of payouts than 1 (1) to (3), priority is given to the control of aligning orange, plum and watermelon on the winning line. Only when orange, plum, and watermelon cannot be withdrawn, it is possible to win a bell with a small number of payouts or one (1) to (3).

  As a result, by performing a stop operation according to whether the player desires a replay winning or a small role winning, either the possibility of winning a replay or the possibility of winning any small role is selected. Can be increased.

  For example, when a player wishes to win a small role, at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L, thereby winning the small role without winning a replay. You can choose to increase your chances. In this case, if a symbol that cannot be replayed at that time can be stopped by stopping at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R before the left reel 2L, the small role is won. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning one of the small roles by controlling the reels drawn on the line. Furthermore, if at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L, and a symbol for which no orange, plum, or watermelon can be awarded at that time can be stopped, then, Regardless of the subsequent stop operation position of the left reel 2L, reel control is performed in which the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are drawn onto the winning line in the left reel 2L, so that 15 payouts can be reliably obtained.

  When the player wishes to win a replay, the player can select to increase the possibility of winning a replay by first stopping the left reel 2L. In this case, regardless of the stop operation position of the left reel 2L, reel control for drawing “replay” onto the winning line is performed, and “replay” is placed on the winning line as much as possible for the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Since the reel control to be pulled in is performed, the possibility of winning a replay can be increased.

  Next, in the challenge bonus, when all the small roles are won and the single bonus is won, the number of draws is determined so that the winning single bonus is drawn into the winning line within the maximum drawable range for each reel. It has been.

  Also, for the left reel 2L, a single bonus is awarded from the stop operation position where the “White 7” symbol that constitutes the single bonus within a maximum of 4 frames cannot be drawn into the winning line, or from symbols already stopped on other reels. In the case where it cannot be made, the number of drawn-in frames is determined so that any of the small roles with a large number of payouts, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are drawn into the winning line within a maximum of four frames. Therefore, for the left reel 2L, on the winning line, “White 7” constituting a single bonus, or “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry”, “White Cherry” constituting black cherry, net cherry and white cherry respectively. "Is stopped and displayed. That is, in the left reel 2L, the single bonus is stopped so that a winning can be made, or one of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry is stopped by stopping any of “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry”. Reel control is performed so as to win a prize.

  Further, when “white 7” constituting the single bonus is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the “white 7” is stopped and displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage. Further, when “white 7” constituting the single bonus is stopped and displayed on the right reel 2R, the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the “white 7” is stopped and displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage. In addition, when the “white 7” constituting the single bonus in the right reel 2R is stopped at a stop operation position where it cannot be drawn into the winning line, the number of frames drawn so that the “bell” is stopped and displayed on the upper stage or the lower stage. Is stipulated. Accordingly, for example, when “white 7” constituting the single bonus is stopped and displayed on the upper or lower stage in the left reel 2L, the reel is configured to stop and display “bell” on the upper or lower stage on the right reel 2R. Since the control is performed, the special symbol combination of “white 7-any-bell” can be stopped and displayed on any winning line.

  From the above, when all the small roles are won and the single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, either the single bonus is won, either black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won, or “ The reel control is performed so as to stop and display the special symbol combination of “white 7-any-bell”. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the single bonus on the winning line, and only when the single bonus cannot be withdrawn, it is possible to win either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry. . In addition, after “White 7” constituting the single bonus is stopped and displayed on the left reel 2L, “White 7” cannot be stopped and displayed on at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, and a single bonus cannot be awarded. Even in this case, the reel control is performed so that the “bell” is stopped and displayed on the upper or lower stage in the right reel 2R, so that the special symbol combination “white 7-any-bell” is stopped and displayed. It has become so. As a result, if all the small roles are won and the single bonus is selected during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus ends when the game ends, and the single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry Since either one of the above is won or the combination of special symbols is displayed in a stopped state, it is always controlled by RT3.

  As described above, even when the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are won during the challenge bonus, the above-described control to RT3 is started unless the challenge bonus is terminated by the game. The challenge bonus continues without In addition, when the single bonus is not won during the challenge bonus, the reel control is performed so that the combination of the special symbol “White 7-any-Bell” is not stopped and displayed on the winning line when the single bonus is not won. Done. As a result, when the single bonus is not won in the challenge bonus, the RT3 is not controlled.

  When the challenge bonus is controlled, the reel control as described above is performed. In the present embodiment, the number of games required to end the challenge bonus can be changed by an operation procedure in the challenge bonus.

  For example, when the challenge bonus is in effect, the possibility of winning a small role can be increased by stopping at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R before the left reel 2L, and a relatively small number of games. You can expect to reach the specified number and end the challenge bonus. For example, in at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “replay” is not drawn and “orange” “plum” “watermelon” is not drawn (for example, in the case of the middle reel 2C, By operating the stop switch 8C when the “bell” of the area number 15 is located at the lower stage, it is possible to win any one of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries and win 15 copies.

  In addition, when the challenge bonus is in effect, by stopping the left reel 2L for the first time, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a replay and to increase the possibility that a small role with a large number of payouts will not be won. It can be expected that the number of games required until this time will be relatively large. For example, first, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where any one of orange, plum, and watermelon on the left reel 2L can be drawn on the winning line. This will increase the chances of a replay being drawn on the winning line if you are elected for replay, and orange, plum, or watermelon if you are not elected for replay. Drawn on line. In the left reel 2L, when any one of orange, plum, and watermelon is drawn on the winning line, at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R has orange, plum, or watermelon stopped on the left reel 2L. By stopping the symbol at the stop operation position where the symbol is not drawn on the winning line, it is possible to increase the possibility that the 15-payout combination will not be won.

  This completes the description of the reel control during the challenge bonus, and then a small role (orange, plum) won simultaneously with the special role during the initial gaming state, single bonus, or RT. In this case as well, reel control and the like so as to make it possible to have an expectation for simultaneous winning of special roles will be described. As in the present embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, a stop operation is performed at the timing when the drawing pattern of the selected special role and the constituent symbol of the selected small role overlap. In such a case, if the control for drawing in the special symbol is given priority over the small symbol, the special symbol is not drawn and the small symbol is drawn, and the small character is awarded a prize. In such a case, the winning of the special role that may be won simultaneously will be denied, and even if a small role that may win simultaneously is won, it will be impossible to expect the winning of the special role . On the other hand, if a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, the constituent symbols of the special role will be drawn in preference to the constituent symbols of the small role, and the selected small role will be missed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for all reels, a display mode in which the “orange” symbol stops on any winning line and a “black 7” symbol on any winning line. The display mode that stops on the top, the display mode that the “Plum” symbol stops on any winning line, and the display mode that the “Net 7” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel are the maximum pull-in ranges, respectively. Arranged beyond 4 frames, the stop operation position can be aimed at the “orange” design and the “black 7” design at the same time, and the stop operation location can be aimed at the “plum” design and the “net 7” design at the same time. ing.

  In addition, the display mode in which the “black 7” symbol stops on any winning line and the display mode in which the “net 7” symbol stops on any winning line are the maximum pull-in ranges for the left reel. A display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol stops on any of the winning lines, a display mode in which the “white cherry” symbol stops on any of the winning lines, Regarding the reel, the display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol stops on any winning line and the display mode in which the “net cherry” symbol stops on any winning line each exceed the maximum draw range of 4 frames. The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position for simultaneously targeting one (1) configuration symbol and one (2) configuration symbol.

  In the internal lottery, challenge bonus (1) + orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (2) + plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) Only special roles and small roles that do not have stop operation positions can be won simultaneously, and special roles and small roles that have stop operation positions that can be aimed at the same time are not won simultaneously.

  For this reason, even if a small role that could be won at the same time wins, the special role won't be denied, and when a small role that might win at the same time wins, It is possible to increase the expectation for winning. In addition, special roles and small roles that have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time are not won at the same time. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by winning the special combination and the small combination at the same time without missing the selected small combination due to being drawn.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the display mode in which the “orange” symbol stops on any winning line and the “plum” symbol stops on any winning line as shown in FIG. And the display mode in which the “black 7” symbol stops on one of the winning lines, and the “net 7” symbol is arranged to exceed the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames. Is displayed on one of the winning lines, and the display mode is arranged to exceed the maximum drawing range of 4 frames, and the “black cherry” symbol for the middle reel is stopped on any of the winning lines. A display mode in which the “white cherry” symbol stops on any winning line, a display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol stops on any winning line for the right reel, and a “net checkered” The display mode where the symbol stops on any of the winning lines has been arranged beyond the maximum draw range of 4 frames, and there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the “orange” symbol and the “plum” symbol. In addition, the arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position at which one (1) configuration symbol and one (2) configuration symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In the internal lottery, the challenge bonus (1) can be won simultaneously with orange or orange and one (1), and the challenge bonus (2) with plum or plum and one (2). In other words, the challenge bonus (1) or (2) can be won simultaneously with orange, plum, or orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), each of which has a symbol that does not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time. Therefore, even if none of the small roles that could be won at the same time won, it may have missed other small roles, so orange, plum, 1 (1)-(2 ) Can be expected to win special roles even in games where none of them wins.

  In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a small combination alone is different from the reel stop control pattern used when simultaneously winning a small combination and a special combination. However, since the stopping mode when a small role alone is elected and the stopping mode when a small role and a special role are simultaneously selected are different, the special mode is specially selected according to the stopping mode. There is a problem that the player can determine whether or not the winning combination is won and the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and “orange-orange-orange” When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, control is performed to align the combination of “orange-orange-orange” in the winning line, but orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange Is selected, among the stop operation positions where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is used as the winning line L1, L2, L3. Can be aligned to both the stop operation position that can be aligned only to the winning line and the winning lines L1 to L5 When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, control is performed to align the combination of “orange-orange-orange” to the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is set to the winning line L4, The combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 only when the stop operation is performed at the stopping operation position that can be aligned only with L5 and cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3. When the control is performed and orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) is selected, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is drawn into the winning line. Among the possible stop operation positions, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the position can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L5, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is selected as the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to align the combination of “orange-orange-orange” only to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L4 and L5. Only when the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  That is, when orange and challenge bonus (1) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, “orange- The orange-orange combination is prioritized over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5, and orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) When the winning operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is selected as the winning line L1, L2. , L3 is preferentially arranged so that the winning lines L4 and L5 are aligned.

  Similarly, if the Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” can be drawn into the winning line, The combination of “Plum-Plum” is prioritized over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5, and Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) When a winning operation is performed and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “plum-plum-plum” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “plum-plum-plum” is set to the winning lines L1, L2. , L3 is preferentially arranged so that the winning lines L4 and L5 are aligned.

  Therefore, when orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum are selected, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” There is a high possibility that the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 will be aligned. Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 When (2) is won, there is a high possibility that the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. In other words, when Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is elected, when Orange and Plum are won, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Plum +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) when winning, Orange, when Plum wins, "Orange-Orange-Orange" The winning lines where the “Plum-Plum-Plum” combination is easy to match are different.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the orange + challenge bonus (1) + the challenge bonus (1) occupying the total value of the orange winning probabilities + orange + 1 (1) than the ratio of the orange winning probabilities, the challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) + orange + challenge bonus (1) + orange with the probability that the percentage of winning bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) will be higher , Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1). Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Challenge Bonus (2) in the winning probability of Plum + Plum's winning probability ratio Plum +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 ( 2) Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2) We draw lots of challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2).

  As a result, when the orange and one (1) of the orange and one (1) are elected at the same time, the orange and one (1) are won at the same time as the challenge bonus (1). The ratio of winning the prize and the bonus (2) is higher when the Plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than when the Plum and one piece (2) are won alone. The winning line with the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is the winning line L1, L2, L3, or the winning line L4, Depending on whether it is L5 or not, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, both are special. It is suggested that the winning role may have been won, but it is impossible to determine whether the special role has been won or not from the winning line where the winning characters are aligned. However, the player's expectation that the special role is elected will not be impaired.

  In this embodiment, orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum are selected, and the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is selected. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is higher than the winning lines L4 and L5. , L2 and L3 are controlled, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) It is selected and it is possible to draw the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” and “Plum-Plum-Plum” into the winning line. When stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, control is performed to align the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. It is supposed to be performed, but Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum are selected, and the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” and “Plum-Plum-Plum” Stop at the stop operation position where the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” and “Plum-Plum-Plum” can be drawn into the winning line when the stop operation is performed at the stop operating position where the winning line can be drawn When an operation is performed, a combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is awarded. Control to align only in L1, L2, L3, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 ( 2) is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” can be drawn into the winning line, “orange-orange- Control may be performed so that the combination of “orange” and “plum-plum-plum” is aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the winning probability of challenge bonus (1) + orange in the total value of the winning probability of orange and challenge bonus (1) + orange in the internal lottery, orange + 1 (1), challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) Winning Probability is different from Orange and Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange has been won, "Orange-Orange-Orange" When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, orange + 1 (1), When the arrangement bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, By controlling the winning lines to be preferentially aligned, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the special role due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of “orange-orange-orange”. However, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the winning probability of challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) to the total value of winning probability of orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) , Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange in the total winning probability of Orange The probability of winning probability is different from Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Orange, Challenge Bonus ( 1) + orange + 1 sheet (1) is elected, and when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, orange + 1 sheet (1 ), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange is selected, and the combination of "Orange-Orange-Orange" is prioritized when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling the winning line to be different, it can be distinguished by the difference in the winning line with the combination of “orange-orange-orange”. You may make it have a change in the expectation degree of the player with respect to the winning of another role. The same applies to the case of plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum, plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2).

  In this embodiment, as described later, when the orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, the chance line is the winning line L4. , Control to align with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than L5, orange +1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), challenge bonus ( 2) When + plum + 1 (2) is won and the orange and plum are missed, control is performed to align the chance line with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Even if you miss an orange or plum, you can determine the difference in the possibility of winning a special role. The percentage that the rounds are aligned to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, the percentage that the chances are aligned to the L4 and L5 is orange, the challenge bonus (1) + orange, the plum, the challenge bonus (2) + plum, If you miss a plum, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) It may be controlled to be equal to when orange and plum are missed, and in this way, when orange and plum wins, the difference in the possibility of winning the special role can be determined. On the other hand, if an orange or plum is missed, the possibility of winning a special role is suggested, but the difference in the possibility of winning cannot be determined. , It is possible to increase the interest of the case of performing the game without Torikobosa orange, a plum.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying that when a small role is won. Since the small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is elected than when the special role is not elected, the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  In addition, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of the selected small type notification effects when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, the second small role announcement effect is selected when orange and one (1) are elected at the same time than when orange and one (1) are elected alone. The ratio is high, and the second small role announcement effect is selected when the plum and one (2) of the plum and one (2) are won at the same time than when the plum and one (2) are won at the same time Since the ratio of winning the orange and plum, the possibility of winning the special role with the winning line with the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” and “Plum-Plum-Plum” and the small role announcement production The types are linked, and the player's sense of expectation for winning the special role can be synergistically increased by the display mode and effect of these reels.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. When the special role is won, the ratio at which the third stop is selected is Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it seems that the possibility of winning the special role is the highest when starting from the third stop It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  Also, when the orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is selected when the third stop and the second stop are selected than when the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. When the third stop, the second is the case where the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the plum and one piece (2) are won alone. Since the ratio of selection at the time of stoppage is high, the possibility of winning a special role by a winning line with a combination of `` Orange-Orange-Orange '' and `` Plum-Plum-Plum '' at the time of winning Orange and Plum, and small The start timing of the role announcement effect is linked, and the player's expectation for winning the special role can be synergistically increased by the display mode of these reels and the start timing of the effect.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you miss any part, if you do not win any of the winning combinations, you can change the stop mode of the reel by stopping the specific stop mode that will not stop, but stop at the same timing There is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when a specific combination is missed by performing an operation, and there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange is selected, and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line, A combination of “orange / plum-orange / plum-orange / plum” excluding “orange-orange-orange” and “plum-plum-plum” (hereinafter referred to as “chance”) is a winning line L1 over winning lines L4 and L5. , L2 and L3 are preferentially aligned, and Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected, and the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” is the winning line When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be drawn into, a chance is won from the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. And performs a control to align preferentially in-L4, L5.

  Similarly, when the Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” cannot be pulled into the winning line, the winning line is the winning line. Plum +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are selected, and the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are prioritized over L4 and L5. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the “Plum” combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, control is performed so that the chance lines are preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3. It has become.

  For this reason, even if Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange is elected, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) is elected, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange-orange-orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, both the orange-orange-orange combinations are aligned with the winning line. If the bonus (1) + orange is won, that is, if only one orange (1) is won and the orange is missed, the chance is placed on the winning lines L1, L2, L3. If there is a high probability of matching, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) is won, Range, if both the one (1) has missed the orange and elected at the same time, chances eyes is likely to align the pay line L4, L5. Similarly, when Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is won, Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) is also won. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” will be aligned with the winning line. If the bonus (2) + plum is won, that is, if only one of the plums (1) (2) is won and the plum is missed, the chance will be placed on the winning lines L1, L2, L3 Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) are won, that is, both Plum and 1 (2) are won at the same time Te when missed a plum, chances eyes is likely to align the pay line L4, L5.

  As a result, when Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are missed, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) are won and the orange and plums are missed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the reels are stopped when the plum is dropped.

  The chances are: Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum was won and Orange and Plum were missed, Orange +1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) will be selected and will be aligned to any winning line on condition that the orange or plum is missed If these winning combinations or combinations of winning combinations are not won, chances are that no winning line is aligned. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as described above, when orange and one piece (1) are elected at the same time, it is more challenging than when orange and one piece (1) are won alone. If the winning percentage is increased at the same time as the bonus (1), and the plum and one (2) are picked at the same time, the plum and one (2) are winning at the same time. Will increase the winning percentage at the same time as the challenge bonus (2), so whether the winning line with the chances is the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. It is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role regardless of which winning line is matched The feeling of expectation will not be spoiled.

  In this embodiment, orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum is won and orange and plum are missed, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus ( 1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) is a winning line that makes it easy to get a chance when you miss an orange or plum. Is changed, but the chance item 1 and the chance item 2 with different display modes are defined, and orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum are won and orange, plum If you miss out, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + Sheets (2), Challenge bonus (2) + +1 sheet plum (2) may orange, also as in the case has missed the plum, in appearance and easy chance eyes of the types of changes in winning.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum is won and the orange or plum is missed, the chance is over the winning lines L4, L5. Control to align the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 at a high rate, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum When +1 sheet (2) is won and orange and plum are missed, control is performed to align the chance lines with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum is won and Orange and Plum are taken If a spill occurs, control is performed to align the chances to only the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2), challenge When the bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) is won and the orange and the plum are missed, the chances may be controlled to be aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the challenge bonus (1) is when the orange and one (1) of the orange and one (1) are won at the same time, rather than when the orange and one (1) are won alone. At the same time, the winning percentage is higher, and the Plum and 1 (2) Plum and 1 (2) are both better than the Challenge Bonus (1) 2) At the same time as the percentage of winning is increased, the winning line with the chances is either the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. Although the player's expectation is changed, for example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process shifts to RT described later, and the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, L The first RT is shifted to when the chances are aligned, and the first RT is advantageous when the chances are aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 (the RT end condition, the replaying player winning probability, It may be configured to shift to a second RT having a different type notification presence / absence or notification ratio, etc., and such a configuration only diversifies the display mode of the reel when orange or plum is missed. In addition, even in the display mode in which the same chance eyes are aligned on the winning line, when Orange and Plum are elected alone, there is a possibility of shifting to RT and Orange + 1 when Orange or Plum is missed (1) In the case where Plum + 1 (2) is won, the advantage can be changed between Orange and RT which may shift when a plum is missed.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you missed a certain role, there is something that suggests that you will miss a specific role by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop if no role is elected, but when you miss a specific role If the player does not know the specific stopping mode to be stopped, he cannot know that he / she has missed the elected special role, and in such a case, he simply missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) are won, and at the first stop (all reels change) If one of the reels is stopped), “Plum” or “Watermelon” will be placed on the winning line when the “Orange” is stopped at the stop operating position where it cannot be pulled into the winning line. If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line where “plum” or “watermelon” is stopped in the remaining reels, the “plum” or Control to draw “orange” into the winning line of “watermelon” is performed. Also, Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) will be selected, and “Orange” will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the “orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the second stop time because the stop operation was performed at the operation position, at the time of the third stop (any one reel is changing) In the first reel stop), the stop that can draw “orange” into the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the first stop. If the stop operation at the operation position is performed, thereby performing the control to draw "orange" on the pay line has stopped the "orange" when the first stop.

  That is, even if the orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control is performed to align a part of the “orange” combination with the winning line.

  In addition, when Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are selected and the Plum is lost at the 1st stop or 2nd stop The same control is performed for the above.

  For this reason, Orange, Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Challenge Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) were elected, and the orange was missed at the first stop and at the second stop Even when the remaining reels are stopped at the stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into the winning line, some of the “orange-orange-orange” combinations are aligned with the winning line. Even if the orange is missed at the time of the 1st stop or the 2nd stop, it is easy to determine whether or not the orange is missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning line. Can be determined. In addition, when Plum, Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Challenge Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are won, and the Plum is missed at the first stop or the second stop Has the same effect.

  In the present embodiment, orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and the first stop and the second stop If the orange is missed at the first stop, the pattern will be an index ("Plum" or "Watermelon" if missed at the first stop, "Orange" stopped at the first stop if missed at the second stop) Is regarded as a stop position where “orange” is stopped, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. Therefore, a stop control table for stopping the combination of “orange-orange-orange” on the winning line, and a combination of “orange-orange-orange” when orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop Since there is no need to prepare a separate stop control table for stopping a part of the winning line on the winning line, a combination of “orange-orange-orange” is used when orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop. The storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced even when control is performed to align a part of the winning line. The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum, plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  In the present embodiment, there is an arrangement in which there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously target “orange” and “plum” that may be missed, but for example, “orange” and “plum” that may be missed For the remaining reels, an arrangement in which there is a range where both of the symbols can be pulled in and one of orange or plum is elected and the constituent symbols of the winning combination are missed at the first stop and at the second stop When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where both the “orange” and “plum” symbols can be drawn into the winning line, the constituent symbol of the winning combination of “orange” and “plum” is stopped on the winning line By doing so, you may be able to control the part of the winning combination to match the winning line, and in this way, it can handle the symbols that did not stop on the winning line Since winning winning combination it is negative that either role of dropped is what can be clearly discriminated.

  In the present embodiment, when a combination of a combination including orange or orange is won and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line, “plum” or “watermelon” If it is a stop operation position that can pull in, these "Plum" or "Watermelon" is pulled in, but the combination of the combination including orange or orange is won and "Orange" cannot be pulled into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, even if it is a stop operation position where “plum” or “watermelon” can be drawn, these “plum” or “watermelon” may not be drawn. By doing so, after the first stop or the second stop, the remaining reels are stopped at a stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line. Performs operation, some combinations of "orange - - Orange Orange" depending on whether aligned in a winning line, it is possible to clearly determine that missed orange. The same applies to a case where a combination of a combination including a plum or a plum is won and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “plum” cannot be drawn into the winning line.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a wins the orange, challenge bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), challenge bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), at least by the second stop, It is preferable to notify the winner or the possibility. As a result, when the orange is missed at the time of the first stop and the second stop, it is possible to draw “orange” into the winning line for the remaining reels if the fact that the orange has been won or the possibility of this is reported. A stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning line. If there are a plurality of roles that do not have a stop operation position that can be pulled in at the same time, that is, a plurality of roles that miss one when aiming at one, it is possible to accurately determine which one has been missed. . The same applies to a case where a winning combination of plum, challenge bonus (2) + plum, plum + 1 (2), challenge bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) is won.

  On the game control board 40 side, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped according to the game state being controlled and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as a result of the internal lottery as described above. , Winning will occur. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. Various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In order to perform the performance, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, there is a game effect corresponding to the game state as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92.

  The game effects include the demonstration effects described above, the bonus effects that are executed until the game state is won after the bonus is won, and the RT effects that are executed when the game state is controlled by RT1 or RT2. Including a production, a continuous production, and a final game production), a navigation production that informs the player of information related to winning a role when a predetermined notification condition is established, and a normal production performed in the initial game state. . Note that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM 142.

  The navigation effect is an effect of notifying the winning winning combination by displaying a character corresponding to the winning combination when any of the small combinations is won. As a navigation effect, for example, an orange character appears when orange is won. Also, a blue character is selected when the plum is selected, a red character is selected when the watermelon is selected, a yellow character is selected when the bell is selected, and a black character is selected when the black cherry is selected. When the net cherry is won, a striped character appears. When the white cherry is won, a white character appears. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the type of the small role that is won from the appearing character.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the player's operation on the touch panel. In the history display effect, the game history is not simply displayed as information, but the sub CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L). 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the rotation), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 51 under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM 142 as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each effect mode, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the effect mode at that time. It will be a thing. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM 142 in advance.

  In the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub control unit 91 performs an effect described later based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  Next, a process executed by the main control unit 41 and a process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  During the challenge bonus, a winning flag is forcibly set even for a small combination that has not been won in the lottery process. As a result, all the small roles are won during the challenge bonus.

  In addition, when a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the winning flag of the single bonus is set, and after the winning flags of all the small roles are set, the challenging bonus flag is set to OFF and the challenge bonus is set. The process of ending is performed. In addition, since it is during the challenge bonus that the winning flags of all the small roles are set, the reel control similar to that during the challenge bonus is performed based on the fact that the winning flags of all the small roles are set. . In addition, even if the single bonus is won, the effects performed during the challenge bonus are continued until at least the winning game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player unrecognizable that the single bonus has been won.

  When a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the timing for setting the challenge bonus flag to the OFF state may be when the game for which the single bonus is won is over.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 333SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and stopped, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-mentioned role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the challenge bonus and the single bonus is won, the corresponding gaming state is controlled.

  In the winning determination process, if it is determined that the challenge bonus (1) or (2) has been won during the RT, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the challenge bonus. Is done. For this reason, even when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won during RT, the RT is not terminated and continues until the challenge bonus is won or the prescribed number of games is consumed.

  Also, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that any one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won, the RT counter of RT1 is reset and RT1 is terminated, and the rule according to the type of replay that has won RT2 is controlled by setting the number of games (200G, 100G, or 70G) in the RT counter of RT2.

  In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a single bonus is won, or when it is determined that a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won (if the challenge bonus continues during the challenge bonus) When the combination of special symbols is determined to be stopped and displayed, if the RT1 is controlled, the RT counter of the RT1 is reset and the RT1 is terminated, and a predetermined number of predetermined games The RT3 is controlled by setting (100G or 150G) in the RT counter of the RT3.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. When RT is in progress, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining games in RT in the payout process, and when it becomes 0, the RT is terminated. In addition, various processes that are not related to winning (for example, a process related to a challenge bonus end control and a winning flag that does not carry over (a winning flag for a small role, etc.) are carried out). In the payout process, the winning flag of the challenge bonus (1) or (2) stored in the special work is not erased. Thereby, the winning flag of the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is carried over to the next game. When it is determined that the challenge bonus has ended as a result of the payout process in the payout process (except when the single bonus is won), the prescribed number of games (70G or 50G) corresponding to the type of the completed challenge bonus is displayed. By setting the RT counter, it is controlled to RT1. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 changes the game state among the initial game state, RT1 to RT3, the challenge bonus, and the single bonus.

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the gaming state.

  When a prize is won in the challenge bonus (1) or (2), the process shifts to the challenge bonus. The challenge bonus ends with a specified number of payouts. Challenge bonus (1) ends with a payout of 300 or more. Challenge bonus (2) ends with 150 or more payouts. After the challenge bonus is ended by paying out the prescribed number, it is controlled to RT1 that becomes a chance for the player.

  On the other hand, the challenge bonus is ended by winning a single bonus before paying out the prescribed number. When a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus ends, and thereafter, it is controlled not to RT1 but to RT3 which is disadvantageous to the player.

  For this reason, when the player is in the challenge bonus, it is conceivable that the player performs a stop operation so as to reach the specified number with a smaller number of games. Specifically, as described above, it is conceivable that at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L. If each game, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry can be won, 300/15 = 20G if challenge bonus (1), 150 if challenge bonus (2). / 15 = 10G can be completed. Conversely, the number of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry that fail to win, and the number of times that a small role such as a bell is won, the number of times that it cannot be won, or the number of times that you win a replay, The number of games required to reach is increased.

  As a result, the number of games required to end the challenge bonus is changed by reaching the specified number according to the player's operation procedure and the amount of game, and the probability of being controlled to RT1 by the end of the specified number of payouts and The probability of winning the single bonus and being controlled by RT3 can be made different, and the fun of the game during the challenge bonus can be improved.

  When the challenge bonus ends with the specified number of payouts, the RT1 that is a chance for the player is controlled over the number of games corresponding to the type of the challenge bonus. When RT1 is in progress, the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is improved.

  When RT1 is selected, if one of the replays (2) to (4) is won and won, the number of games corresponding to the type of replay won is controlled to RT2, which is advantageous to the player. . During RT2, the winning probability of replay (1) is set to a very high probability.

  On the other hand, when the challenge bonus is ended by winning the single bonus and the single bonus is won, or when the single bonus is won during RT1 or in the initial gaming state, the game is controlled to RT3 which is disadvantageous for the player. RT3 is continued until the prescribed number of games is consumed or the challenge bonus is won, and during that time, it is not controlled by RT1 or RT2.

  Note that the number of games specified for RT3 depends on whether the single bonus is won, the black cherry, the net cherry, or the white cherry is won, and the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The number of prescribed games is set differently. Here, when the single bonus is won, the prescribed number of games as the end condition is reduced. For this reason, when a single bonus is won, the RT3 game is better for winning a single bonus than when winning a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry or when a special symbol combination is stopped. It can be said that it is advantageous for the player in that the number is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the substantial probability of being controlled by RT3 is set to be higher when the challenge bonus is being applied than when the challenge bonus is not being applied.

  The probability of being controlled by RT3 during the challenge bonus is equal to the winning probability of the single bonus, which is 5%. On the other hand, the probability of being controlled by RT3 when not in the challenge bonus is (single bonus winning probability × single bonus winning probability) + (cherry winning probability × cherry pulling probability). That is, the probability of being controlled to RT3 when not in the challenge bonus is (5% × 1/9) + (0.15% × 2 × 2/3) = 0.75%.

  In this way, the probability of being controlled by RT3 when the game is a challenge bonus can be improved over the probability of being controlled by RT3 when the game state is other than the challenge bonus. For this reason, when the challenge bonus is in effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension as to whether it is controlled by RT1 by ending with the specified number of payouts or whether it is won by a single bonus and controlled by RT3. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the replays (2) to (4) are not read as a lottery target combination and are not won when in the initial gaming state. It may be configured that 4) is read out as the lottery object combination and won and won with a predetermined probability (for example, the determination value number “1”) to be controlled to RT2. Thereby, in the initial gaming state, the player can have a sense of expectation for being directly controlled by RT2.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 changes the game state as described above, and transmits a command to the effect control board 90 according to the game state and the progress of the game. In contrast, the sub-control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state at the time of power supply stop, Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various effects such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 are performed. In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends. In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game effect execution process for executing the above-described game effect according to the game state or the like.

  Here, the RT effect among the game effects performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be specifically described. The RT effect is an effect that is executed when the gaming state is controlled to RT1 or RT2. During the period from when the control to RT1 or RT2 is started until the remaining number of games up to at least the specified number of games reaches five, an RT effect is produced as an RT effect in a manner corresponding to the internal winning situation. . The effect during RT is a common effect so that it becomes difficult for the player to specify the conditions (for example, the type of challenge bonus that ended and the type of replay that won the prize) that triggered the RT1 or RT2. Alternatively, it may be an effect selected at random regardless of the conditions that triggered the RT. Thereby, it can be made difficult to specify how many times the specified number of games has been controlled from the production during RT. It should be noted that a predetermined effect may be performed even when controlled by RT3.

  Also, on the condition that the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has become 5 games, whether or not RT is continued as a RT effect by controlling whether or not RT2 is controlled and information related to whether or not a challenge bonus is won An effect of notifying information about whether or not is performed. As such effects, for example, after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached 5 games, the effect that develops a series of stories in the remaining games and then the ending of the story is notified, and the specified game Even if the remaining number of games reaches 5 games, the timing during RT is continued and the timing related to the final game in which the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games becomes 1 game (when the final game starts, when it ends And a final game effect in which the end effect is notified after the predetermined effect is started at a predetermined timing related to the final game, such as when the next game starts.

  As the continuous effect, for example, a story in which a player character and an enemy character battle each other is developed, and it may be notified whether the player character wins, loses, or draws as an end. As the final game effect, for example, the symbols “O” and “X” may be changed to notify whether or not the symbol “O” is stopped and displayed as an end.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is controlled by the information related to whether or not the challenge bonus is won and when it is controlled by RT2 when the remaining number of games up to the prescribed number of games becomes 5. Whether to execute a continuous effect or a final game effect is determined as an effect of notifying information relating to whether or not RT continues.

  Note that the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment specifies the number of games or the number of remaining games digested after starting RT1 regardless of whether or not the replays (2) to (4) are won during RT1. Counting is possible, and based on the counting result, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of games has reached 5 games until the specified number of RT1 games is consumed. If the sub-control unit 91 determines that the remaining number of games has reached 5, the information regarding whether or not the challenge bonus is won and whether or not the RT is continued by being controlled by the RT2 are determined. As an effect for informing related information, it is determined whether to execute a continuous effect or a final game effect.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment counts the number of games or the number of remaining games that have been digested since the start of RT2 in an identifiable manner, and the remaining games until the number of games defined in RT2 is digested based on the count result It is determined whether the number has reached 5 games. When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the remaining number of games has become five games, the sub-control unit 91 executes a continuous effect or executes a final game effect as an effect of notifying information regarding whether or not the challenge bonus has been won. Decide what to do.

  In addition, a plurality of types of effect modes of RT effect and continuous effect are provided, and are determined and executed as one mode. Examples of the plurality of types of effects include, for example, the color of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the appearing characters, the sound effect / game sound output from the speakers 53, 54, the lighting pattern of the effect effect LED 52, and the like. It is composed of a plurality of different types of stages (for example, a first stage to a fifth stage).

  In addition, the continuous effect and the final game effect are provided with a plurality of types with different endings, and are determined and executed as one type. In addition, when it becomes necessary to change the ending of the continuous production according to the winning situation during execution of the continuous production (for example, when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won during the continuous production or replay (2) To (4)), it is possible to replace the type of continuous production after that with a type corresponding to the winning situation. As a result, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that has an end in accordance with the winning situation.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for specifically explaining a table for determining the effect mode of the RT effect and the continuous effect and a table for determining the type of the continuous effect and the final game effect. The table shown in FIG. 17 is stored in the ROM 91b of the sub-control unit 91.

  In FIG. 17 (a), a winning combination (orange, plum, 1 (1) to (2), hereinafter referred to as a CB simultaneous winning winning combination) that can be won simultaneously with the challenge bonus (1) or (2) has been won. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation mode determination table for deciding the production | presentation aspect of RT production and continuous production at the time. The production mode of the production during RT and the continuous production in the present embodiment is configured to be changeable on the condition that the CB simultaneous winning small combination is won.

  When the CB simultaneous winning small role is won and the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won (including the simultaneous winning), the stage up (for example, from the first stage to the second stage) Transition to the stage, transition from the nth stage to the (n + 1) th stage, and no change when the fifth (highest) stage, and no change (for example, the nth stage) with a probability of 30% Decided to stage down (for example, transition from the fifth stage to the fourth stage, transition from the nth stage to the n-1 stage, and no change when the first (lowest) stage). As shown, the distribution rate is set.

  Also, when the CB simultaneous winning small role is won and neither of the challenge bonuses (1) or (2) is won, the stage will be determined with a probability of 20% and will change with a probability of 60%. The distribution ratio is set so that it is determined that there is no, and the stage down is determined with a probability of 20%.

  In this way, even when the CB simultaneous winning small role is won, the stage is improved when one of them is won, rather than when not winning the challenge bonus (1) or (2). The distribution rate is set so that the probability of performing is high. For this reason, when the stage effect and the continuous effect are being executed, when the stage is up, when the stage is continuously raised, and when the highest stage (fifth stage) is reached, the challenge bonus is given respectively. You can improve your expectation for winning.

  FIG. 17B illustrates an effect mode determination table for determining the effect mode of the effect during RT when any one of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is won. FIG. The effect mode of the effect during RT in the present embodiment is configured to be changeable on condition that any one of the replays (2) to (4) is won.

  When one of the replays (2) to (4) is won, the stage is decided to be up with a probability of 60%, it is decided without change with a probability of 30%, and the stage is decided to be down with a probability of 10%. In addition, a distribution rate is set.

  In FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b), an example of changing the effect mode of the RT effect and the continuous effect on condition that one of the CB simultaneous winning miniatures and the replays (2) to (4) is won. Explained. However, the condition for changing the effect mode of the effect during RT and the continuous effect is not limited to this, and is established by, for example, digesting a predetermined number of games or stopping and displaying a predetermined combination on the winning line. You may do. The timing for changing the effect mode of the RT effect and the continuous effect is after winning the winning combination that triggered the change until the next game is started after the selected game ends. As long as it is between, any timing may be sufficient.

  FIG. 17C is a diagram for explaining an effect determination table for determining the type of effect to be executed after the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games has become 5.

  When the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games in RT1 becomes 5 and is not controlled by RT2 (referred to when RT is not yet determined), or the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games in RT2 is 5 When it becomes (at the end of RT2) and the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won (including the simultaneous win), it is a continuous performance that informs the winner of the challenge bonus with a 30% probability The distribution ratio is set so that it is determined to be the final game effect A that is determined to be A and notifies the winner of the challenge bonus by ending with a probability of 70%. As the continuous effect A, for example, after a story to be battled is developed, a message such as “Challenge Bonus Winning” may be displayed after the player character has won as a result. Further, as the final game effect A, for example, after changing, the symbol “O” may be stopped and displayed as a result and a message such as “Challenge Bonus Winning” may be displayed.

  Even when the RT continuation is not confirmed or when the RT2 is over, if the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is not won, the continuous effect B for notifying the winner of the challenge bonus with a 90% probability The distribution ratio is set so that the final game effect B is announced with a 10% probability of notifying the winner of the challenge bonus by the ending. As the continuous effect B, for example, after a story to be battled is developed, a message such as “sorry” may be displayed as the player character loses as a ending. Further, as the final game effect B, for example, after changing, the symbol “x” may be stopped and displayed as a ending message.

  In addition, since the distribution ratio is set as described above, the expectation that the challenge bonus is won when the final game production is performed rather than when the continuous production is performed. Can be improved. As a result, when a continuous performance is performed, it is possible to notify the end of RT from 5 games before and to gradually increase the expectation for winning the challenge bonus every time the game is consumed. When the final game effect is performed, the end of RT is suddenly notified. However, the expectation that the challenge bonus is won can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is performed.

  In addition, when the continuous effect B is being executed, if the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won, the effect is changed to an effect informing the challenge bonus winning by the ending (that is, the effect of the continuous effect A is replaced). Continuous production. In addition, when it is determined that the final game effect B is to be executed, and the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won at the time of executing the effect, the effect of notifying the challenge bonus winning by the ending is given. An effect is performed by replacing (that is, replacing the effect of the final game effect A). As a result, it is possible to notify the ending that is consistent with the winning situation of the challenge bonus (1) or (2).

  In addition, when performing a continuous production that informs the winner of the bonus or non-win of the bonus by the ending, if the winner is selected from one of the replays (2) to (4), is the winner winning the bonus by the ending of the production? After replacing with an effect that notifies whether it is difficult to specify whether or not the challenge bonus is difficult to determine, a predetermined effect that notifies the RT continuation by the end is executed after the end of the continuous effect. The effect of notifying that the challenge bonus is unknown may be, for example, that after the story of the battle between the player character and the enemy character is developed, the player character and the enemy character are drawn by the ending. . In addition, as a predetermined effect for notifying the RT continuation by the ending after the end of the continuous effect, for example, after changing, the symbol “O” is stopped and displayed as a message “RT continuation” as the ending. Also good.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute the final game effect for notifying the winner of the challenge bonus or the non-win by the ending, when the effect is started, one of the replays (2) to (4) is selected and RT2 is selected. When it is controlled or already controlled, it is executed in place of a predetermined effect that notifies the RT continuation by the end of the effect.

  Further, even if any of the replays (2) to (4) is not won when the continuous effect is being executed, the RT is not performed due to the ending after the continuous effect is completed with a predetermined probability. You may comprise so that the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports continuation may be performed. As a predetermined effect in this case, for example, after changing, a symbol “x” may be stopped and displayed as a result and a message such as “RT end” may be displayed. Thereby, even if it is a case where a predetermined | prescribed effect is performed after a continuous effect is performed, since the case where RT continues or the case where it does not continue may generate | occur | produce, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, it may replace with the effect which alert | reports a challenge bonus winning unknown, and may be replaced with the effect which alert | reports a challenge bonus non-win. This also makes it possible to postpone the timing of notifying whether or not the challenge bonus has been won until the timing when RT2 ends, extending the period for the player to expect and improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  When the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games of RT1 has become 5, and when the player has already won one of the replays (2) to (4) and is controlled by RT2 (referred to as RT continuation confirmation) ) And when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won (including the simultaneous win), it is determined to be a continuous performance C that notifies the RT continuation by the end with a probability of 70%, and a probability of 30% Thus, the distribution ratio is set so that the final game effect C for notifying the RT continuation by the ending is determined. As the continuous effect C, for example, after the story of the battle is developed, the player side character may win and display a message “RT continuation” as the end. Further, as the final game effect C, for example, after changing, the symbol “O” may be stopped and displayed as a ending and a message “RT continued” may be displayed.

  Even if the RT continuation is confirmed, if neither of the challenge bonuses (1) or (2) has been won, it will be determined as a continuous performance C that informs the RT continuation by the end with a probability of 90%. The distribution rate is set so that the final game effect C that notifies the RT continuation by the probability is determined as the final game effect C.

  As described above, when the RT continuation is confirmed, the distribution ratio is set so that the continuous effect C is determined with higher probability than the final game effect C regardless of whether or not the challenge bonus is won. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that RT will continue when the continuous performance is performed rather than when the final game performance is performed.

  In addition, even if the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is won when the continuous production C is executed, the RT continuation is notified by the ending without performing the process of changing to another production. Is done. In addition, as described above, when the RT continuation is not confirmed and the challenge bonus is won, the replay (2) to (4) is won and the RT continuation is confirmed during the continuous performance execution. Whether or not the challenge bonus has been won as an end of the continuous performance is unknown and RT continuation is notified after the continuous performance. As a result, it is possible to postpone the timing for notifying whether or not the challenge bonus is won until the timing when RT2 is finished, and the period during which the player has a sense of expectation is lengthened and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

  FIG. 18 is a timing chart for specifically explaining the game effect corresponding to the game state.

  In FIG. 18, the horizontal axis indicates the passage of time, and from the top of the vertical axis, the (a) column indicates a gaming state, and the (b) column indicates a game effect. In addition, the number with a circle shown in the lower column in FIG. 18 has shown the timing in each of (a)-(b). Hereinafter, timing 1 to timing 6 are simply indicated by numbers.

  Timing 1 indicates the timing when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) ends. When it is determined that the challenge bonus has ended, as shown in the column (a), RT1 is controlled by setting a specified number of games corresponding to the type of the completed challenge bonus in the RT counter. When it is determined that the challenge bonus has ended, as shown in column (b), the challenge bonus effect is ended and the RT effect is started.

  Timing 2 shows the timing when winning a replay (2) to (4) during RT1. When it is determined that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won, as shown in the column (a), by setting a specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay won in the RT counter, RT1 Is terminated and controlled by RT2. As described above, while the gaming state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, as the RT effect, the effect during RT started at timing 1 is continuously performed as shown in the column (b). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying that one of the replays (2) to (4) is won and controlled by RT2 from the RT effect.

  Timing 4 shows the timing when the specified number of games RT1 is consumed from timing 1, and timing 3 shows the timing when the remaining number of games reaches 5 games until the specified number of games is consumed.

  In FIG. 18, as indicated by timing 2, since one of the replays (2) to (4) is won during RT 1, RT continuation confirmation shown in FIG. 17 (c) is made at timing 3. It is timed to determine whether to execute the continuous effect C or the final game effect C, and even if any effect is executed, the RT continuation is notified by the end. Then, after timing 4, the effect during RT is resumed.

  In FIG. 18, the case has been described in which the replay (2) to (4) is won and the RT2 has already been controlled at the timing 2 before the timing 3. However, if the player has not won any of the replays (2) to (4) at the timing 3 and is not controlled by the RT2, the continuous effect is given according to the winning situation and distribution rate of the challenge bonus at the timing 3. Or the final game production. At timing 3, the replays (2) to (4) are not yet won in any of the replays (2) to (4) and are not controlled by the RT2, and the replays (2) to (4) When a prize is won and controlled by RT2, as described above, a predetermined effect that informs the RT continuation after the continuous effect (notification of challenge bonus winning unknown or notification of challenge bonus not winning) is completed. Is done.

  Timing 6 shows the timing when the prescribed number of games RT2 has been consumed from timing 2, and timing 5 shows the timing when the number of remaining games until the prescribed number of games has been consumed becomes five games.

  The timing 5 in FIG. 18 is the end of RT2 shown in FIG. 17C, and the effect to be executed is determined according to the winning situation of the challenge bonus. Then, the winning status of the challenge bonus is notified by the end of the effect. Then, after timing 6, the RT effect is ended and the normal effect is started.

  It should be noted that the effect modes of the RT effect and the continuous effect shown in FIG. 18 are shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B on the condition that CB simultaneous winning small roles and replays (2) to (4) are won. It is changed according to the distribution rate explained in. For this reason, when the production style of the production during RT or the continuous production is changed, the expectation for the challenge bonus and the expectation for the RT continuation can be enhanced.

Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment described above will be described.
(1) In the embodiment described above, when a challenge bonus is won, it is controlled to RT1 when it is terminated by paying out a prescribed number, but when it is terminated by winning a single bonus. Is not controlled by RT1, but any one of a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry is won or a combination of special symbols is stopped and controlled to RT3 which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, even when the player wins the challenge bonus, the player can have a sense of expectation that the prescribed number will be paid out without winning the single bonus and that the RT1 will be controlled after the challenge bonus. As a result, even if the challenge bonus is controlled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game that is played before the challenge bonus ends.

  (2) In the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R in which the number of frames to be drawn is changed to 0 to 1 during the challenge bonus in the above-described embodiment, the symbols of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R among the constituent symbols of the single bonus “White 7” is not arranged in the range of 0 to 1 frame. When a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus ends when the selected game ends. In addition, when the special combination and the small combination are won, the reel control is performed so that the special combination is preferentially won. For this reason, in a game in which a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, control is performed so that the symbols of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R among the symbols of the winning single bonus are preferentially drawn, but within the range of 0 to 1 frame. Since two or more are not arranged in the game, the player is not always drawn on the winning line and stopped as a display result. As a result, it can be made difficult for the player to detect that the single bonus is won from the reel control and the display result of the variable display device 2.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the specified number of sheets as an end condition is different between the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2). For this reason, the number of games required to reach the specified number can be varied according to the type of challenge bonus. Thereby, the probability of winning and ending the single bonus during the challenge bonus can be varied depending on the type of challenge bonus. As a result, depending on the type of challenge bonus, it is possible to vary the feeling of expectation that the process will be terminated by paying out the prescribed number and controlled to RT1. Specifically, a smaller prescribed number is set for the challenge bonus (2) than for the challenge bonus (1), and it can be expected that the number of games required to reach the prescribed number will be reduced. As a result, the challenge bonus (2) can be more expected to be controlled by RT1 than the challenge bonus (1).

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, while being controlled by the challenge bonus, at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is stopped before the left reel 2L to win a 15-sheet payout combination. It is possible to increase the possibility and the possibility of winning a small role, and it can be expected that the challenge bonus will be completed by reaching the specified number with a relatively small number of games. As a result, according to the player's operation procedure, the probability of being controlled to RT1 by the end of the prescribed number of payouts can be different from the probability of winning a single bonus and being controlled to RT3, and the degree of intervention in the game And the interest of the game during the challenge bonus can be improved.

  (5) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the connector restricting member restricts the removal of the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case. Since removal of the connector restricting member from the board case is restricted in this state, the cable side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board side connector 620a unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In other words, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace of breakage, and it is impossible to connect an unauthorized instrument such as a driving instrument without leaving a trace. You will be able to discover something reliably.

  (6-1) The termination conditions of RT1 and RT2 in the embodiment described above are not satisfied even if the challenge bonus is won unless the challenge bonus is won. As a result, even if the challenge bonus is won and the game is not won, the RT can be controlled continuously until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the challenge bonus is won when there are remaining games.

  Also, especially in RT1 and RT2, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a challenge bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control with replay is preferred over control with challenge bonus. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the challenge bonus is won. In addition, since the winning flag of the challenge bonus is carried over from the next game onward until the challenge bonus is won, it is possible to win the challenge bonus won during that time after the RT reaches the specified number of games Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the challenge bonus at the end of RT.

  (6-2) Also, as described above, replays (2) to (4) are lottery with higher probability than in the initial gaming state when RT1 is won with high probability for replay (1). Is done. Further, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. As a result, even when the player is awarded one of the replays (2) to (4) and is controlled by RT2 during RT1, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that it is controlled by RT2. Even if it is specified that the game is controlled by RT2, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many games RT2 are controlled by. Further, even when controlled by RT2, as described in the timing 2 of FIG. 18, the effect during RT continuously performed from the previous game is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to obscure the number of end games of a series of RTs.

  On the other hand, whether or not the challenge bonus is won is started at the timing related to the final game or the continuous production that starts when the remaining number of games reaches 5 games until the specified number of games is consumed. It is notified by the final game effect. For this reason, it is possible to make the interrelationship between the timing at which the effect of notifying whether or not the challenge bonus has been won and the RT end timing have an unexpected relationship. That is, if there is a case where a continuous effect is started 5 games before the RT end timing, the final game effect may be started at a timing related to the final game at the RT end timing. For this reason, the player has a sense of expectation that RT may still continue because the continuous performance has not started, and anxiety that RT may end suddenly when the final game performance is suddenly performed. And can improve the fun of the game.

  (6-3) Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), a prize is given to one of the replays (2) to (4) while the continuous effect determined when the RT continuation is not confirmed is being executed. When the control to RT2 is started, a predetermined effect that notifies the RT continuation by the end is executed after the end of the continuous effect. For this reason, it is possible to give a surprise that a predetermined effect may be performed after the continuous effect is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17B, on the condition that one of the replays (2) to (4) that is controlled by RT2 is won, RT The production mode of the medium production can change. For this reason, when the production mode changes, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by RT2, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), CB simultaneous winning that may be won simultaneously with the challenge bonus (1) or (2) that is controlled by the challenge bonus On the condition that a small role is won, the production mode during RT and the production mode during continuous production may change. For this reason, when the production mode during the RT and the production during the continuous production changes, the player can have a sense of expectation that the challenge bonus has been won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Second Embodiment In the first embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the challenge bonus is controlled to RT1 when it ends by paying out the prescribed number of coins, and is not controlled to RT1 when the single bonus is won and ended during the challenge bonus. . In the second embodiment, an example will be described in which the challenge bonus is not controlled by RT1 when the bonus is terminated by paying out the prescribed number, but is controlled by RT1 when the single bonus is won and terminated during the challenge bonus.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment is omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment are mainly described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the combination of symbols in the variable display device 2, the gaming state read out as a lottery target combination, and other information in the second embodiment. As the types of RTs in the present embodiment, RT1 to RT2 having different probabilities of winning the re-gamer are provided. In RT1, when winning a single bonus, when winning a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry (except when the challenge bonus continues), or when a special symbol combination is stopped and displayed Be controlled. RT2 is controlled when one of the replays (2) to (4) wins.

  The challenge bonus (1) ends on condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 20 or more. On the other hand, the challenge bonus (2) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 10 or more. Further, when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is finished by paying out the prescribed number, the game is controlled to the initial gaming state.

  On the other hand, if you are selected as a single bonus when you are controlled by the challenge bonus and finish, you can win a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, or a combination of special symbols Displayed and controlled by RT1. Note that the reel control in the second embodiment is the same as the reel control described in the first embodiment. For this reason, when a single bonus is won in the challenge bonus, a single bonus is awarded, a black cherry, a net cherry, a white cherry is awarded, or a special “white 7-any-bell” The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. In the winning determination process described in the first embodiment, when a single bonus is won, when black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won (except when the challenge bonus is continued), or a special symbol When the combination is stopped and displayed, processing for controlling to RT1 is performed. In addition, the number of games required to end the challenge bonus can be changed by operating procedures during the challenge bonus. Even if a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus is continued without starting control to RT1, unless the challenge bonus is terminated by the game. The

  70 games are set as the prescribed number of RT1 games when a single bonus is won. 50 games are set as the prescribed number of games in RT1 when winning a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry, or when a combination of special symbols is stopped.

Also in the second embodiment, the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is high when RT1. Specifically, since the winning rate of each of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is RT1, “300” is specified as the number of determination values, so 300 / 65536≈ 0.000457. Therefore, the probability of winning in any one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlling to RT2 during RT1 controlled after winning the single bonus is 1- [1- (0.000457 × 3)] ⁷⁰ ≈ 62%. Also, after winning the black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry and after the combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed, RT1 is controlled during RT1 and replays (2) to (4) are awarded to RT2. The probability of being controlled is 1- [1- (0.000457 × 3)] ⁵⁰ ≈50%.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, after the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is finished by paying out the prescribed number of games, control is made to the initial gaming state, and the challenge bonus (1) or (2) is finished by winning the single bonus. After that, the replays (2) to (4) which are the triggers for the transition to RT2 are controlled to RT1, which increases the winning probability, and the player to transition to RT2 by controlling to RT1 Can raise the sense of expectation.

  For this reason, when the game state can be shifted to RT1 (initial game state, challenge bonus (except when the challenge bonus continues), single bonus), winning a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry , And a special symbol combination can be expected to be stopped and displayed to the player.

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment.

  When a prize is won in the challenge bonus (1) or (2), the process shifts to the challenge bonus. The challenge bonus ends with a specified number of payouts. The challenge bonus (1) ends with 20 or more payouts. Challenge bonus (2) ends with 10 or more payouts. After the challenge bonus is ended by paying out the prescribed number, the game is controlled to the initial gaming state.

  On the other hand, the challenge bonus is ended by winning a single bonus before paying out the prescribed number. When a single bonus is won during the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus ends, and thereafter, it is controlled to RT1 instead of the initial gaming state.

  For this reason, when the player is in the challenge bonus, it is conceivable that the player performs a stop operation so as to reach the specified number with a larger number of games. Specifically, as described in the first embodiment, it is conceivable that the left reel 2L is first stopped. As a result, the possibility of winning a replay, the possibility of not winning a small role with a large number of payouts, and the possibility of not winning a small role are increased, and the number of games required to reach the specified number is relatively increased. be able to. As a result, the number of games required until the challenge bonus is completed is changed by reaching the specified number according to the player's operation procedure and the amount of game, and the initial game state is controlled by the end of the specified number of payouts. The probability and the probability of winning the single bonus and being controlled by RT1 can be made different, and the fun of the game during the challenge bonus can be improved.

  When the challenge bonus ends with a single bonus winning, either a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won, or a combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed. When the single bonus is over, the game is controlled to RT1 which is a chance for the player over the number of games corresponding to the display result of the game. When RT1 is in progress, the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is improved.

  When RT1 is selected, if one of the replays (2) to (4) is won and won, the number of games corresponding to the type of replay won is controlled to RT2, which is advantageous to the player. . During RT2, the winning probability of replay (1) is set to a very high probability. Note that the number of games specified for RT1 depends on whether the single bonus is won, the black cherry, the net cherry, or the white cherry is won, and the special symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The number of prescribed games is set differently. Here, when a single bonus is won, the number of games of a prescribed number that is an end condition increases. For this reason, when winning a single bonus, the RT1 game is better for winning a single bonus than when winning a black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry or when a special symbol combination is stopped. It can be said that it is advantageous for the player in that the number increases.

  On the other hand, when the challenge bonus is ended by paying out the prescribed number, it is controlled to an initial gaming state which is disadvantageous for the player as compared to being controlled by RT1.

  Also in the second embodiment, the substantial probability of being controlled by RT1 is set to be higher when the challenge bonus is in effect than when it is not during the challenge bonus.

  The probability of being controlled by RT1 during the challenge bonus is equal to the winning probability of the single bonus, which is 5%. On the other hand, the probability of being controlled to RT1 when not in the challenge bonus is (single bonus winning probability × single bonus winning probability) + (cherry winning probability × cherry pulling probability). That is, the probability of being controlled to RT1 when not in the challenge bonus is (5% × 1/9) + (0.15% × 2 × 2/3) = 0.75%.

  Thus, the probability of being controlled by RT1 when it is a challenge bonus can be improved over the probability of being controlled by RT1 when the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus. For this reason, when the challenge bonus is in effect, the player is given a sense of tension as to whether the game is controlled to the initial gaming state by ending with the specified number of payouts or whether the single bonus is won and controlled by RT1. Can improve the interest of the game.

Next, main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described.
(1) In the second embodiment described above, when a challenge bonus is won, it is controlled to RT1 when it ends by winning a single bonus, but it ends when a prescribed number is paid out. In this case, it is controlled to the initial gaming state without being controlled by RT1. For this reason, even when the player has won the challenge bonus, the player can have a sense of expectation that the single bonus will be won and the RT1 will be controlled by the time the specified number is paid out. As a result, even if the challenge bonus is controlled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game that is played before the challenge bonus ends.

  (2) In the second embodiment described above, the specified number of sheets as the end condition is different between the challenge bonus (1) and the challenge bonus (2). For this reason, the number of games required to reach the specified number can be varied according to the type of challenge bonus. Thereby, the probability of winning and ending the single bonus during the challenge bonus can be varied depending on the type of challenge bonus. As a result, depending on the type of challenge bonus, it is possible to vary the feeling of expectation that the process will be terminated by paying out the prescribed number and controlled to RT1. More specifically, the challenge bonus (1) is set to have a larger prescribed number than the challenge bonus (2), and it can be expected that the number of games required to reach the prescribed number will increase. As a result, the challenge bonus (1) can be more expected to be controlled by RT1 than the challenge bonus (2).

  (3) In the second embodiment described above, the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time while being controlled by the challenge bonus, so that there is a possibility of winning a replay and a possibility of not winning a small role with a large number of payouts. , And the possibility of not winning the small role can be increased, and it can be expected that the number of games required to reach the prescribed number will be relatively large. As a result, according to the player's operation procedure, the probability of winning the single bonus and controlling to RT1 can be made different from the probability of being controlled to the initial gaming state by the end of the specified number of payouts. The degree of intervention can be increased, and the interest of the game during the challenge bonus can be improved.

  Regarding the second embodiment described above, the same technical effect as in the case of the first embodiment described above can be obtained with the configuration based on the technical idea common to the first embodiment described above.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1) In the first embodiment described above, RT1 is controlled when the challenge bonus is ended by paying out the prescribed number of coins, and when the single bonus winning is completed during the challenge bonus, the single bonus is set. In the above example, the first specific display results such as black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and special symbols are displayed in a stopped state and controlled by RT3 without being controlled by RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is controlled by RT1 when the challenge bonus is terminated by paying out the specified number of coins. When the single bonus winning is completed during the challenge bonus, the specific display for the first implementation is displayed according to the winning situation. There may be a case in which the result is stopped and displayed and controlled by RT3 without being controlled by RT1, and the case where a predetermined first execution special display result is stopped and displayed and controlled by RT1 may occur.

  For example, a single transfer winning and replay may be read out as a lottery target at the same time during the challenge bonus, and the single transfer winning is ended without winning the replay simultaneously during the challenge bonus. In this case, the reel control is performed so that the above-described specific display result for the first implementation is stopped and controlled by RT3, and the replay is simultaneously won during the challenge bonus and the single transfer winning is won and finished. In this case, the reel control may be performed and controlled by RT1 so that the first special display result for execution described above is stopped and displayed.

  As another example, there may be a case where a plurality of types of single transfer prizes are provided and the first single transfer prize is won alone and the first single transfer prize is won at the same time as the second single transfer prize. In the challenge bonus, when the first single transfer winning is won and finished, the reel control is performed so that the above-described first implementation specific display result is stopped and displayed, and controlled by RT3, During the challenge bonus, the reel control is performed by RT1 so that the first special display result is stopped and displayed when the first single shift winning is won and the second single shift winning is also ended. You may comprise.

  As a result, in the challenge bonus, when the player is expected to be controlled by the specified number of payouts and being controlled to RT1 without winning the single transfer prize, and the single transfer prize is allowed to occur Even so, the first implementation special display result is stopped and controlled to RT1 as a result of winning such that the replay is won simultaneously or the second single shift prize is won simultaneously. Can give players a sense of anticipation.

  In the case of the configuration as described above, a plurality of types of first display special display results are provided, and the type of winning situation is such that the replay is won simultaneously or the second single shift winning is won simultaneously. Accordingly, a special display result for the first implementation of a predetermined type may be stopped and displayed. Further, a different number of games may be set as the specified number of games of RT1 depending on the type of the first special display result for the execution that has been stopped.

  For example, when the replay is won simultaneously when the single transfer winning is won, the reel control is performed so that the first special display result for the simultaneous replay win is stopped and displayed on RT1 over 100G. It is configured to be controlled, and when the second single transfer winning is simultaneously won when the single transfer winning is won, the special display result for the first implementation for the single simultaneous winning is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the reel control may be performed to control the RT1 over 200G.

  As a result, the specified number of games is controlled to be different RT1 according to the type of the first execution special display result, so the player's expectation depends on which type of the first execution special display result is derived. The feeling can be different.

  (2) In the second embodiment described above, when the single bonus is won and finished during the challenge bonus, the second implementation specific display such as a combination of a single bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, special symbols, etc. An example has been described in which a different number of games is set as the specified number of games in RT1 depending on which of the results is stopped and displayed. However, the second execution specific display result type that is stopped and displayed when the single bonus is won during the challenge bonus is stopped so that the second specific display result of the type corresponding to the winning situation is stopped and displayed. You may comprise.

  For example, when a challenge bonus is in effect, a single transfer prize and a plurality of types of replays (here, replay A and replay B) may be read out at the same time as a winning lottery. Replay is controlled so that when the replay is won and the single transition winning is finished without simultaneous winning, the specific display result for the second implementation of the single type is stopped and displayed and controlled by RT1 over 100G. The reel control is performed so that the second specific display result of the type at the time of replay A is stopped and displayed when the replay A is simultaneously won during the challenge bonus and the single transfer winning is finished. It is configured to be controlled by RT1, and Replay B is won simultaneously during the challenge bonus. The reel control is performed so that the second specific display result of the type at the time of the replay B is stopped and displayed and controlled by RT1 over 300G. .

  Accordingly, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the winning situation where the second specific display result of the type controlled by RT1 having a large expected value of the number of games can be stopped and displayed.

  (3) In the second embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the challenge bonus is controlled to RT1 when it ends by paying out the specified number of coins, and is controlled to RT1 when the single bonus is ended during the challenge bonus. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the single bonus is won during the challenge bonus and ended, depending on the winning situation, the second implementation specific display result is stopped and controlled by RT1, The special display result for the second embodiment may be stopped and displayed, and may be controlled by the RT3 described in the first embodiment without being controlled by the RT1.

  For example, a single transfer winning and replay may be read out as a lottery target at the same time during the challenge bonus, and the single transfer winning is ended without winning the replay simultaneously during the challenge bonus. In this case, the reel control is performed so that the above-described specific display result for the second implementation is stopped and controlled by RT1, and the replay is won at the same time during the challenge bonus and the single transfer winning is finished. In this case, the reel control may be performed so that the above-mentioned second special display result is stopped and displayed, and the RT3 may be controlled.

  As another example, there may be a case where a plurality of types of single transfer prizes are provided and the first single transfer prize is won alone and the first single transfer prize is won at the same time as the second single transfer prize. The reel control is performed so that the above-described second specific display result is stopped when the first single shift winning is won during the challenge bonus, and the RT1 is controlled by RT1. During the challenge bonus, the reel control is performed and the RT3 is controlled so that the above-mentioned special display result for the second implementation is stopped and displayed when the first single transfer winning is won and the second single transfer winning is also ended. You may comprise.

  As a result, even in the case of a challenge bonus, even if the occurrence of a single transfer prize is allowed, the winning situation is such that the replay is won simultaneously or the second single transfer prize is won simultaneously. It is possible to give the player a feeling of tension when the second special display result is stopped and displayed and controlled to RT3.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the possibility of winning a 15-payout winning combination by operating at least one of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R before stopping the left reel 2L and the small winning combination Replay by increasing the possibility of playing, increasing the number of payouts per game, reducing the number of games required to pay out the specified number of challenge bonuses, and operating the left reel 2L in the first stop procedure Increase the chances of winning a prize, the possibility of not winning a small role with a large number of payouts, and the possibility of not winning a small role, so that the number of payouts per game is reduced and the specified number of challenge bonuses is paid out. The example which can be changed so that the number of required games increases may be described. That is, the example in which the number of games required to pay out the prescribed number of challenge bonuses is changed by changing the number of payouts per game in accordance with the stop order of the reels 2L to 2R has been described.

  However, the procedure for changing the payout number per game is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an operation timing of a predetermined stop switch among the stop switches 8L to 8R. For example, when a predetermined stop switch is stopped at the first timing, the number of payouts per game is increased so that the number of games required to pay out the prescribed number of challenge bonuses is reduced. When the switch is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, the payout number per game is reduced, and the number of games required to pay out the specified number of challenge bonuses is changed. It may be allowed. The procedure for changing the number of payouts per game may be a combination of the stop order of the reels 2L to 2R and the operation timing of a predetermined stop switch among the stop switches 8L to 8R. Thereby, the variation of the procedure which changes the payout number per game becomes abundant, and the interest of the game in a challenge bonus can be improved.

  Further, an example has been described in which the number of payouts per game is changed by winning a combination of small types with different payout numbers according to the player's procedure. However, the specific means for changing the number of payouts per game is not limited to this, and the same type of small part wins, and the winning of the small part occurs according to the player's procedure. The number of winning lines to be changed may be changed, or the number of small combinations in which winning is generated may be changed according to the player's procedure.

  First, if the same type of small role wins and the number of winning lines where the winning of the small role is generated is changed according to the player's procedure, for example, a winning occurs due to the display result of one reel When a specific small combination to be performed (for example, a two-payout cherry that generates a prize based on the display result of the left reel 2L) is in the challenge bonus, when the specific small combination is stopped in the first procedure, the specific small combination Is displayed on one winning line (for example, stopped at the middle stage) to generate a winning, and when the stop operation is performed in the second procedure, the specific small role is stopped and displayed on two or more winning lines (for example, It may be configured such that a prize is generated by stopping at an upper stage or a lower stage. Accordingly, since the number of winning lines is greater when the stop operation is performed in the second procedure than when the stop operation is performed in the first procedure, the number of payouts per game can be increased. .

  Further, as the number of small combinations for which a winning occurs according to the player's procedure, for example, a first small combination that can be won independently (for example, a winning 2 is generated according to the display result of the left reel 2L). When a bonus is being given to a second small part that can be won at the same time as the first small part (for example, a bell that can be doubled at the same time as a cherry) In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the first procedure, a winning of only the first small combination is generated alone, and when the stop operation is performed in the second procedure, the first small combination and the second small combination are generated. You may comprise so that a prize may be generated simultaneously. As a result, the number of small roles won is increased when the stop operation is performed in the second procedure than when the stop operation is performed in the first procedure, so that the number of payouts per game is increased. be able to.

  In addition, a prize is awarded to a small role of a different type depending on the player's procedure described above, and a prize for the small role is generated according to the player's procedure. The number of payouts per game is changed by selectively combining the change of the number of winning lines to be performed and the change of the number of small roles in which winnings are generated according to the player's procedure. There may be. Thereby, the variation of the specific means for changing the number of payout per game becomes abundant, and the interest of the game in the challenge bonus can be improved.

  Even when configured as described above, the number of games required to pay out the prescribed number of challenge bonuses can be changed according to the player's procedure, and as a result, the probability of winning a single bonus during the challenge bonus Can be made different, the degree of intervention in the game can be increased, and the interest of the game during the challenge bonus can be improved.

  (5-1) In the embodiment described above, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) that trigger the control of RT2 are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. As for the combination of replay (1), which has a high probability when controlled by RT1, the combination of “replay” and “bell” (for example, “bell” is similar to replays (2) to (4)). -Bell-Replay "etc.). In addition, the combination of replays (1) to (4) is not limited to a combination of a plurality of symbols, and may be configured of symbols different for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, “bell-replay-orange”, “plum-bell-watermelon”, and the like may be used. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the player has won the replay (1) or the replay (2) to (4) when the player is in RT and has won a replay. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of games for which a series of RTs are completed.

  (5-2) In the embodiment described above, the combination of the challenge bonus (1) or (2) that triggers the control to RT1 is a combination of the same symbols for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the present invention is not limited to the same symbol, and may be different symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. For example, the challenge bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the challenge bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-black BAR”, and the like. As a result, when a challenge bonus is won, it can be difficult to understand which challenge bonus is won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, making it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it becomes difficult to specify the prescribed number of games of RT1 controlled after the bonus ends. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of games for which a series of RTs will end, and to make the player pay attention to the above-described continuous production and final game production, effectively improving the interest of the game. it can.

  (5-3) The display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight than the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2. You may install in the position which is easy to visually recognize. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of bells is derived in the variable display device 2, “bell-bell-bell” may be stopped and displayed on a winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when the challenge bonus (1) or (2) that triggers the control of the RT1 is won, the winning on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is made regardless of the type of the challenge bonus won. You may comprise so that common "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed on a line. Further, when any one of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers the control of the replay (1) and the above RT2 wins, regardless of the type of the replay that has won, You may comprise so that common "replay-replay-replay" may be stopped and displayed on a winning line. This makes it difficult for a player who views the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game to determine which type of challenge bonus has been won and what type of replay has been won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RT2 is controlled by winning one of the replays (2) to (4) in which the winning probability is improved during the RT1 has been described. However, the combination of symbols that trigger the control to RT2 is not limited to the combination of symbols of winning combinations that improve the winning probability during RT1, but may be a combination of symbols of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations In addition, a combination of a plurality of specific off-line symbols that are stopped and displayed on the winning line only when a predetermined winning combination is won may be used. Depending on which of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations is won or which of a plurality of specific off-combination combinations is stopped, the prescribed number of games may be controlled to be different RT.

  The plurality of predetermined winning combinations may be, for example, a plurality of winning combinations whose winning probability increases during a single bonus in which a single bonus is won and transferred to the next one game. In this case, the combination of symbols of the single bonus and the predetermined winning combination may be composed of symbols different for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, “watermelon-replay-orange”, “replay-bell-watermelon”, and the like may be used. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a single bonus has been won and that a predetermined winning combination has been won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  (7) As an end condition for a series of RTs in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the game is completed by using the prescribed number of games or winning a challenge bonus. However, a series of RT end conditions is not limited to this, and may be configured to be satisfied by a predetermined stop combination of RT end symbols.

  The predetermined RT end symbol combinations are, for example, the symbols constituting each of the reels at intervals of 7 frames out of 21 frames, like the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry shown in FIG. It may be a winning combination with the symbols arranged in the configuration symbols. That is, if any cherry wins during RT, the RT ends even if the specified number of games has not been reached since the start of the RT.

  In the following description, a case where the winning combination at which RT ends is set to, for example, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 3, on the reel 2L, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry symbols ("black cherry", "net cherry", and "white cherry") are respectively included in 21 frames. Arranged at intervals of 7 frames. For this reason, an appropriate timing for stopping the “black cherry” of the reel 2L on the winning line, an appropriate timing for stopping the “net cherry” on the winning line, and a stop timing for “white cherry” on the winning line. The proper timings of each do not overlap each other. That is, there is no common timing that can target any two symbols of “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry”. In addition, even when the stop switch 8L is operated at any timing, any one of “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry” can be stopped on the winning line. For this reason, there is no timing for not stopping “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry” on the winning line. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries if the stop operation is not performed within the drawing range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combinations of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries can be aligned. Also, even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on one of the winning lines, the symbols that make up the special combination on the middle reel and the right reel will be separated by four or more intervals. Since there is a stop operation position where the constituent symbols cannot be pulled in, the combination of special roles can be avoided. As a result, even if any cherries or special roles are elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherries, net cherries, white cherries, or special roles It is possible to avoid the end of RT due to winning a cherry or special role.

  As a result, even after the start of RT, even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at a timing outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination, that is, a game operation that avoids the winning combination of the falling combination. RT can be continued by a person's technical intervention, so the interest associated with RT can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the left reel, there is an area where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol is drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if one of the cherries is won during RT, it is impossible to deliberately remove the cherry if the type is not known The winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but if the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role has been won, the RT will end. Become. As a result, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not the RT is continued depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with the RT can be further enhanced.

  In addition, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are accompanied by payout of three or less medals, which is the number of medals necessary to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Because it is a prize (with a maximum of two payouts), even if avoiding a falling role, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry The payout rate of the machine 1 is not greatly affected.

  When a predetermined notification condition is established, a navigation effect is performed when one of the falling cherries, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry, is won. For this reason, when a navigation effect is being performed, even if a fallen winning combination is won, based on the navigation effect, an operation procedure that avoids the winning of the falling combination, that is, a player outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination Since the player can perform the stop operation, that is, the RT can be continued by the player's game skill amount by the player's technical intervention, the interest associated with the RT can be enhanced.

  The combination of predetermined RT end symbols may be a specific replay different from the replays (1) to (4). In this case, the probability of winning a specific replay may differ depending on the type of bonus that triggered the control of the RT and the types of replays (2) to (4). Thereby, it is possible to make a player pay more attention to which type of bonus is controlled and which type of replay among the replays (2) to (4) is won.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the replays (2) to (4) are not read out as the target objects of the internal lottery when in the initial gaming state has been described. Even when it is, the replays (2) to (4) may be read and won with a low probability (for example, each determination value is “1”). Thereby, even in the initial gaming state, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by RT2 without going through RT1.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, even if the game is controlled by RT2 after being controlled by RT1, a game in which the number of games controlled by the series of RTs is added to the prescribed game number of RT1 by 5 games. There may be cases where there are fewer than numbers. For example, if the replay (4) is won and controlled to RT2 before the five games are consumed in the RT1 controlled after the challenge bonus (1) is finished, the number of games controlled in a series of RTs There may be a case where the number is less than the number of games obtained by adding 5 games to the specified number of games of RT1. In this case, as described with reference to FIG. 18, when a continuous effect is executed when 65 games are digested after being controlled by RT1, the number of games after the end of the continuous effect does not satisfy 5 games and the RT2 There is a possibility that a continuous effect cannot be executed in the remaining five games up to the specified number of games, and an unnatural effect is executed.

  In order to prevent such unnatural effects from being executed, if the number of games controlled by a series of RTs is less than the number of games obtained by adding 5 games to the specified number of games in RT1, (a ) It is configured so that the final game effect is forcibly determined without determining the continuous effect at the end of RT2, (b) a series after starting the direct effect when 65 games are consumed after being controlled by RT1. (C) up to 5 remaining games up to the specified number of games of RT2, the end timing of the continuous production that has been started before that, In order not to overlap, it is determined whether to execute a continuous effect or a final game effect at a stage before 65 games are digested after being controlled by RT1, and so on. It may be used in the technique. As a result, even if the number of games controlled by a series of RTs is less than the number of games obtained by adding 5 games to the number of games specified for RT1, it is possible to execute natural effects and improve the fun of the game. Can be made.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the operation unit (start lever 7, single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, check switch 10, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, touch panel, setting key provided in the slot machine 1 When a specific operation of the switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, etc.) is detected, the RT state may be initialized (the value of the gaming state flag is updated to a value indicating the initial gaming state). For example, the specific operation may be a combination of predetermined operations of two or more operation units. However, the procedure may be completely different from the operation related to the setting change. The operation procedure may be a combination of other operations including some operations.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. The example in which the notification effect indicating the winning of the special role is executed when the sub control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role has been won has been described. However, not only a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, but also a notification effect that notifies the game state to be returned may be executed. For example, when the game state to be returned is the initial game state, the main CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating the initial game state and executes a notification effect indicating the initial game state to the sub-control unit 91. Also good. Further, when the game state to be returned is RT, the main CPU 41a may transmit a power-on command indicating the RT type and execute a notification effect indicating the RT type to the sub-control unit 91. Good. Note that the gaming state to be restored may be all controlled gaming states (for example, initial gaming state, RT1 to RT2, challenge bonus, etc.), or a predetermined gaming state ( For example, among the initial gaming state, RT1 to RT2, challenge bonus, etc., the initial gaming state, only the challenge bonus) may be used.

  In addition, as a notification device, a dedicated notification device may be provided, or the credit display device 11, the game auxiliary display device 12, the payout display device 13, and the sub control unit 91 that are directly controlled by the main control unit 41 control. You may utilize the indicator used in progress of games, such as the liquid crystal display 51. FIG.

  (12) In the above-described first embodiment, the example in which the RT1 is controlled after the predetermined bonus (challenge bonus) ends is described. In addition, as the type of RT1, the example in which the prescribed number of games is different depending on the type of bonus that has been finished has been described, but not limited to this, the probability of winning a replay may be different. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of RT is controlled, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this case, the probability of winning at least replay b and replay c among a plurality of types of replays (for example, replay a to replay c) is further controlled in RT (here, RT1) controlled after the end of a predetermined bonus. The number of determination values may be set so as to be higher than that in the initial gaming state. Thereby, when controlled by RT1, the probability of winning replay b and replay c is improved. Replay b and replay c can be won only at RT1, and are not won in gaming states other than RT1 (including those that are not read out as lottery targets and those with a judgment value of 0). May be.

  Further, when the player wins Replay b when the player is RT1, the player has a higher probability of winning Replay a than the player who is RT1 (in this case, RT2). When replay c is won, the probability of winning replay a is lower than when RT2 is reached, and even when replay b is won, RT is disadvantageous for the player who is not controlled by RT2 (here, RT3). You may comprise. As a result, when controlled to RT1, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the replay b and being controlled by the RT2, and having anxiety about winning the replay c and being controlled by the RT3. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared to a slot machine that is not controlled by RT2 or RT3.

  RT1 includes a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of at least one of the probability of winning replay b and the probability of winning replay c, and RT (challenge bonus) determined in advance according to the type of bonus that has been completed. (1) RT1 at the end, RT1 ′ at the end of the challenge bonus (2), RT1 ″ at the end of the challenge bonus (3), etc. In other words, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the bonus is controlled to RT1 of a type having a high probability of winning replay b, and RT1 more advantageous depending on the type of bonus to be controlled. (RT that has a high probability of winning Replay b) Kicking it possible, as compared to that controlled the same RT regardless of the type of bonus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (13) The RT in the above-described embodiment is an RT in which the winning probability of replay is improved from the initial gaming state, but there is a high possibility that the number of medals to be acquired is low as in the initial gaming state, that is, one game. The RT may be such that the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained per win is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  In the case of such a configuration, when a bonus is won during RT or when a predetermined notification condition (specific symbol winning, specific symbol combination derivation, etc.) is satisfied, derivation is performed by, for example, a predetermining means. Procedure notification game state (hereinafter referred to as a state where a navigation effect is performed) for notifying the type of award winning (small role) determined to be permitted or an operation procedure (operation timing, operation order, etc.) for generating the winning award, Whether to control to AT), and when controlling to AT, the number of AT continuing games to be controlled by AT is determined, and when it is determined to control to AT, the number of AT continuing games is consumed or bonus You may comprise so that it may control to RT + AT until winning and RT is complete | finished. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased. Further, when the player is further controlled by the AT during the RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the bonus may have been won, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, even if the bonus is not won, the player is given a sense of expectation because it is controlled to RT + AT when the predetermined notification condition described above is satisfied.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and giving a game value associated with winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (15) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using a game ball. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (16) It should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (1)

Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the combination of display results of a plurality of variable display units,
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a special transfer winning with a transition of a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
Special gaming state control means for controlling to the special gaming state by the occurrence of the special transfer prize;
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state,
The derivation control means can derive a combination of specific display results when the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state becomes a specific determination result,
The advantageous state control means can be controlled to the advantageous state after the special gaming state ends based on the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state being the specific determination result,
The derivation control means includes
In the normal gaming state, for each of the plurality of variable display units, when the derivation operation means is operated, predetermined derivation control is performed for deriving identification information within the first pull-in range as a display result from a reference position,
In the special gaming state, a specific variable display unit of the plurality of variable display units performs the same derivation control as the predetermined derivation control, while non-specific variable display units other than the specific variable display unit Performs specific derivation control for deriving identification information within a second pull-in range narrower than the first pull-in range from a reference position as a display result when the deriving operation means is operated,
The combination of the specific display results that can be derived when the determination result of the prior determination means in the special gaming state becomes the specific determination result is a state in which the display result is not derived in the non-specific variable display unit However, it can be specified by the display result of the specific variable display unit,
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination unit in the special gaming state is the specific determination result , the combination of the specific display result on the specific variable display unit when the derivation operation unit is operated at a predetermined timing Derivation control to derive the display results that make up
When the determination result of the prior determination unit in the special gaming state is a determination result different from the specific determination result, when the derivation operation unit is operated at the predetermined timing, the specific variable display unit A slot machine that performs derivation control that does not derive a display result that constitutes a combination of the specific display results.

Images